Home

Canon C9065S Operation Manual

1. PEE 232 Sort by set IM IM Offset stacking Stack the prints with an offset This setting is only available when the Offset stacking setting of the active Workflow profile is set to Sets as in job Advanced settings Finishing equipment often requires that the printed sheets are delivered in a certain order For finishers that are inte grated in your printing system the required settings are adapted automatically However sometimes it can be nec essary to change a number of settings manually for example when you want to finish the prints using offline finishers If required you can change the Sheet order Sheet orien tation Print order and Rotation 166 Chapter 6 Print jobs Change the print delivery settings How to change the print delivery settings 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job of which you want to change the settings You can only change the settings of the active print job after you stopped the printer press the Stop button two times Press Properties Touch the Print delivery Make the required changes Press OK Press OK NANA YY mStack the prints with an offset on page 155 Chapter 6 Print jobs 167 Change the finis
2. Top left A3 B4 11 X 17 LGL Top edge 1 2 staples Top left 1 staple 7 ea el A4 Bs LTR Top edge 2 staples 272 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the inserter How to place the cover sheet original Staple set tings Top left 1 staple Left edge 2 staples Top right 1 staple Right edge 2 staples Top right 1 staple Top right 1 staple Output re sults A3 B4 11 X 17 LGL X I A4 B5 LTR A3 B4 11 X 17 LGL Top right 1 staple Top right 1 staple
3. ABC A4 Bs5 LTR Top right 1 staple Right edge 2 staples A3 B4 11 X 17 LGL Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 273 Load the media into the inserter How to place the cover sheet original Staple set Output re tings sults Saddle stitch AAA ing 1 Paper can be loaded into both the upper and lower trays Load the paper facing the same side for both the upper and lower trays Load the media into the inserter 1 Adjust the slide guides to fit the paper size To use the upper tray Adjust the slide guide To use the lower tray Open the lower tray cover 274 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the inserter Adjust the slide guide 2 Open a package of paper and remove the paper stack A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper oO IMPORTANT Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight NOTE m For high quality printouts use paper recommended by your local authorized dealer m Before loading paper always fan the sheets
4. Scheduled jobs 3jobs 1 selected Job Pages Sets Submitted Duration Used media Z Job 1 May 2 2014 Normal A4 E Mr Jones z 3 7 37 28 AM gz 44D 80 aint white Job 2 May 2 2011 Normal A4 Mr Jones aoo 7 37 45 AM oss F A4 D 80 gme Red Job 3 May 2 2011 Normal A4 Ms Jones 800 1 7 37 59 AM Gee Fi A4 D 80 gm white Wating jobs 1 job 0 selected Submitted Used media Job 4 May 2 2011 Normal A4 Ms Jones s00 1 2 7 38 15 AM Dg F as D 80 gin white O Schedule Jobs Trays system 170 The jobs view mDescription of the print job settings on page 104 Chapter 6 Printjobs 103 Description of the print job settings Description of the print job settings Introduction Usually the settings for a print job is defined in PDLs applications printer drivers au tomated workflows or hotfolder default tickets However when a job has arrived on the PRISMAsyne controller you can change a number of job settings for all jobs that are currently not being printed This section gives an overview of the print job settings that you can change using the operator panel Illustration Normal A4 440 60 gin white 171 The job properties Description Original The Original pane shows the settings you can define for the paper originals The Output pane sho
5. NOTE If Professional Puncher C1 is attached Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 is required Illustration V 116 The puncher Chapter 2 Main parts 47 The puncher Components and their functions Puncher components and their functions No Function Front Cover of Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 Open this cover to remove jammed paper mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 48 Chapter 2 Main parts Inserter Inserter Introduction The optional inserter Document Insertion Unit H1 allows you to load inserts and covers for booklets O IMPORTANT Rolled or curled paper must be straightened before placing it into Document In sertion Unit H1 Do not place the following types of paper into Document Insertion Unit Doing so may cause a paper jam Insertion sheets with holes or tears Severely curled or wrinkled paper Clipped or stapled insertion sheets Transparencies or other highly transparent insertion sheets Labels Some types of paper cannot be used with Document Insertion Unit H1 For more information contact your local authorized dealer Chapter 2 Main parts 49 Inserter Illustration 117 Inserter Components and their functions Inserter components and their functions Upper tray Load paper you want to use as a cover sheet insertion
6. Face up Deliver the prints face up first sheet on top Face up reverse Deliver the prints face up last sheet on top Face down Deliver the prints face down first sheet on top 5 Face down reverse Deliver the prints face down last sheet on top Chapter 6 Print jobs 111 Description of the print job settings Setting 112 Chapter 6 Print jobs Values Description siY Header up LEF Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position vertical Header up SEF Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in landscape position horizontal Header down LEF Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in portrait position vertical a Header down SEF Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in landscape position horizontal Advanced m Front back settings gt Default value The front page on the front the Print order back page on the back m Back front Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front Advanced o degrees settings gt m 180 degrees Rotation Rotates the prints 180 degrees Description of the print job settings Output settings Punching Setting Values Description Punching Here you can define the number of punch holes Die set de pendent Location Here you can define the location of the punch hole
7. 3 Booklet tray Booklet Finisher A1 Saddle stitched or saddle folded prints are output to this tray 4 Lower tray Prints are output to this tray Middle tray Prints are output to this tray Upper tray Prints are output to this tray 34 Chapter 2 Main parts Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Components and their functions internal view i Fan ae Vv A O SA Or Y Co G OF Q 0 2 yy F 18 Internal view Stacker stapler components and their functions No Function 1 Punch waste tray Puncher Unit BG1 BH1 BF1 Pull out the punch waste tray to remove punch waste 2 Trim waste tray Inner Booklet Trimmer A1 Pull out the trim waste tray to discard trim waste Chapter 2 Main parts 35 Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Finishing options 36 A CAUTION Do not place your fingers or hands on the finisher when the finisher is in use Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the finisher When removing paper from the tray of the finisher do not place your hands on the output tray of the finisher The tray may move upward and your hands may get caught Do not place anything other than output paper in the trays of the finisher as doing so may damage the trays Do not place anything under the trays of the finisher as doing so may damage the trays
8. lt Feeding Direction O IMPORTANT A3 11 x 17 and A4R LTRR paper can be Z folded NOTE a The Z folded areas are shown in the illustration below Glass plate f Feeder m p A Bci NM m If paper that has been Z folded is included in the output the sheets may not be aligned when output Half fold Each sheet of A4R LTRR paper is half folded Paper folded in a half fold is output to the tray specified for the finisher Chapter 2 Main parts 53 Folder re A B AAR Feeding Direction NOTE The half folded areas are shown in the illustration below Glass plate f Feeder a w Tri fold in A4R LTRR prints are folded into tri fold in to make them more conveniently sized for insertion into envelopes Paper folded in a tri fold in is output to the exit slot of the paper folding unit 54 Chapter 2 Main parts Folder Leading Edge Length AB Cc lt Feeding Direction NOTE The areas of the tri fold in are shown in the illustration below Glass plate 0 Fee
9. 3 Touch Clean the clean roller main unit and touch Start A wizard opens 4 Touch Next A status message displays 5 Press Finish 6 Touch Stop to close the Maintenance tasks menu Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 353 Clean the automatic document feeder rollers Clean the automatic document feeder rollers Introduction If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder clean the rollers of the feeder m It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the feeder m Use clean A4 LTR paper 60 to 80 g m2 16 lb bond to 20 lb bond m Feeder roller cleaning cannot be performed during printing Clean the ADF automatically 1 Touch System gt Maintenance 2 Press Start maintenance 3 Touch Clean the rollers of the ADF and touch Start A wizard opens 4 Put 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder 5 Touch Next A status message displays 6 Press Finish 7 Touch Stop to close the Maintenance tasks menu 354 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Clean the drum Clean the drum Introduction Printed images may be light or distorted when the printer is used immediately after instal lation or after a long period time of not being used If printed images are light or distorted clean the drum inside the printer as necessary NOTE m It takes approximately 35 seconds to clean the
10. Chapter 7 Copy jobs Multiple up Images per sheet The machine prints the same image multiple times next to each other By default the system keeps the size of the originals When you copy A4 LTR originals with the Same up and Images per sheet settings at 2 the printer auto matically prints the job on A3 11 x 17 for example When you cut A3 11 x 17 sheets in two you get two identical A4 LTR copies of your document To reduce your A4 LTR originals to As STMT prints you can use the zoom function or select another media type The machine prints multiple consecutive images on 1 side of a sheet next to each other The printer prints the same image twice on one side of a sheet but one image is upside down compared to the other Here you can select the number of images you want to print when you select Same up or Multiple up Description of the copy job settings Output settings Zoom Setting Zoom Values Fit to page Percent Description When Fit to page is On the image is resized so it fits onto the page When Fit to page is Off the original size of the image is maintained Use the and buttons to reduce or enlarge the size of the image from 25 to 400 The preview pane immediately shows the results of your action Chapter 7 Copy jobs 181 Description of the copy job settings Output settings A
11. cccccsssecssceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeesseesseesssseeaueneeaneeseeeeess 211 Adjust the image to improve the copy and scan quality 212 Chapter 8 Scan JODS a a aaa 213 Introduction to the scan FUNCTION cccccceeecesseeessssenscsneeaneeeeceeeeeeceeeees 214 Description of the scan job SettingS cccceeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 216 SCAN tO TG yrccscissicsanecehtivadaccwnesacteece cansiesuceasenseeicassutscateaeahdeneeavdduuntecessadevanns 227 CAM to WS B ivan thee scasdticctiinewietieedscanssaseiedbGeuenlecdaddccsdceatataaneeeniedelsMaxediedas 228 Combine subsets into one fil cscssessessesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseees 229 Chapter 9 Paper toner and Staples is ciisccisessssesesisccedienceedecndeieienscecdevaiviasneivecessccceestet 233 CONSUMADIES ccccccceeeeeceeeesscesseeeseecesaeeeeaueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessesesssesssssnenen 234 Loading PAPEL ccccccceeceeesscesseseceeeneaueeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeessseseeseenenseeees 237 Load the media into the integrated paper trayS cssseees 237 Adjust the integrated paper tray to hold a different paper size 243 Load the media into the paper MOUIE cccccceeceeeseeeessseeseeerenes 245 Adjust the media size for the paper MOULIE ccssccssceeeeeeeeeees 252 Load the media into the bulk paper MOUIES sseseeeeeeeees 257 Contents Adjust the media size for the bulk paper
12. Color of the bar Description The output location is required and available The output location is required in the future but not available then For example because the output location will be full soon Red The output location is required now but not available For ex ample because the output location is full Gray The output location is required but availability is unknown 5 The zoom control The zoom control enables you to adjust the time scale visible in the Schedule When you touch the zoom button a drop down list appears Then you can select the desired time scale 5 minutes 8 hours mDescription of the Trays view on page 139 mWork with the workflow profiles on page 320 136 Chapter 6 Print jobs Load the media using the Schedule view Load the media using the Schedule view Introduction This section describes how to load the media into a paper tray When you load the media via the Load button in the Schedule the media is automat ically assigned to the correct tray When you load and assign the media via the Assign button in the Trays view you must assign the loaded media to the corresponding paper tray manually O IMPORTANT Make sure you load the media at the right moment as indicated on the operator panel When to do m The Schedule displays a red bar next to a required media The red bar indicates that a scheduled job
13. How to create a hotfolder default ticket default_ticket jdf 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes P oN Am B wW Right click the printer driver of your imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO C9065 PRO and select Printing preferences Define the required settings Click the Save icon in the Templates bar Enter a name for the template Click OK Right click the template you just created and select Save as ticket Browse to the shared network folder and click Save The template is saved as a hotfolder default ticket 342 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibra tion Introduction to the Maintenance section Introduction to the Maintenance section Introduction The maintenance section displays the following information m Billing counters The Billing counters section displays the total number of prints that have been made since the machine was installed Which counters there are visible depends on the region You cannot reset the billing counters m Day counters The Day counters section displays the number of prints that have been made since the counter was last reset to o You can for example reset the day counters at the be ginning of a working day or before you start a new job for a particular customer Furthermore the maintenance section gives access to the following functions m S
14. Introduction The following consumables are available For more information contact your local autho rized dealer We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your local authorized dealer before your stock runs out Paper stock In addition to plain paper A3 B4 A4 B5 As 11 x 17 LGL LTR and STMT re cycled paper color paper transparencies recommended for this printer tracing paper labels other types of paper stock are available For more information contact your local authorized dealer A CAUTION Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames as this may cause the paper to ignite resulting in burns or a fire O IMPORTANT To prevent moisture buildup tightly wrap remaining paper in its original package for storage 234 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Consumables Toner NOTE m For high quality printouts use paper recommended by your local authorized dealer Some commercially available paper types are not suited to this printer Contact your local authorized dealer when you need to purchase paper Ifa message asking you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the touch panel display replace the used toner cartridge with a new one Toner comes in four colors black cyan magenta and yellow Check the toner color that you need to replace before ordering toner from your local authorized dealer Also when replacing the toner cartridge ma
15. Number Function 2 Display the file name of the current job for document printing or current stream for stream printing Furthermore the progress of the current job is displayed For document printing the counter can display the following information m Set X of Y m Sheet X of Y or Sheet X X represents the current status of the print job Y represents the total number of sets or sheets of a print job When the sorting method for a job is set to By set and a set contains at least 40 pages then the dashboard displays the set count Set X of Y When the sorting method for a job is set to By page or when you print stream jobs then the dashboard only displays a sheet count 3 Display the action that you must do now or soon The colors of the vertical status bar at the left hand side match the colors of the LED on the operator panel and the operator attention light When the color is orange or red a message indicates the required action Orange means that action is required soon How long before an upcoming action the operator panel starts to display the message depends on the defined warning time Red means that action is required now 4 Displays a status action when you must do something now or soon regarding the following items m Finishers m Staple cartridges Toner reservoir NOTE The operator panel can only display one message at a time When there are more messages the operator panel display
16. Output settings Media Setting Media Values Description Names of Here you can select the media for the copy job The the media in list displays all the media that are available in the me the media dia catalogue The media catalog is a list of media that catalogue you can define in the Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller Output settings Cover Setting Cover Values Description si Here you can indicate that the print job requires a front cover When the setting is enabled the corre sponding setting Media becomes enabled Print sides Here you can select the sides of the front cover you want to print on Both sides Front side m Back side m None Here you can indicate that the print job requires a E back cover When the setting is enabled the corre sponding setting Media becomes enabled m Back cover Here you can select the sides of the back cover you want to print on Both sides Front side Back side None Chapter 7 Copy jobs 179 Description of the copy job settings Output settings Layout 180 Setting Layout Values Description The machine prints the pages with no special layout settings The machine prints the pages in booklet order The pages 1 and 4 are printed on the front side of a sheet The pages 2 and 3 are printed on the back side of a sheet
17. 136 The Media catalog window 3 From the toolbar select the required option to maintain the Media catalog NOTE When you add change or import new media make sure that you enter the correct values for the following options m Weight m Media family m Media type 66 Chapter 3 Operating concept Maintain the Media catalog The correct values are required for optimal print quality iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Log out Help Media Colour Preferences Configuration Media Media families Media management Media M A4 100g m2 TopColor Type fTopColor M A4 135g m2 TopColor fone M A3 100g m2 TopColor m A3 135g m2 TopColor NGP m Letter 8 5x11 105g m2 Length 0 1 mm m Letter 8 5x11 135g m2 M Tabloid 11x17 105g m2 Uisg I Tabloid 11x17 135g m2 ne th m A4 tab 223x297 Tab ind M Letter tab 9x11 Tab inc Punch count Weight a m fioo Colour White RGB colour r Red 255 Green 355 Media family Uncoated Cid Surface type Normal Shape Normal Cancel 137 The Add new media window Chapter 3 Operating concept 67 Maintain the Media families Maintain the Media families Introduction The Media family is a group of media that uses the same output profile The controller provides by default the media families coated and uncoated An expert can create a new
18. 190 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Setting Output settings Binding Setting Binding Values Z fold large sheets only Print method Values TF 1 staple 2 staples Saddle stitching Description Use the Print method option to define on which side to print a Print inside m Print outside Check the preview for the result of the selection Description Here you can define the required number of staples Furthermore you can define where you want the sta ples with the Location option The available locations for one staple Top left Top right Bottom left a Bottom right The available locations for two staples m Left edge Top edge Bottom edge a Right edge Check the preview for the result of the selection Chapter 7 Copy jobs 191 Description of the copy job settings Output settings Trimming Setting Values Description Trimming Trims the long edge according to the specified value The minimum trim size is 2 mm Trim size Job name Setting Values Description Job name By default all print jobs are named Print job and include a sequence number To identify your copy job more easily in the list of waiting jobs or scheduled jobs you can change the name of the copy job When you t
19. Ss The finishing options cannot be set for paper less than 60g m 16 lb bond Do not select the finishing options NOTE If the finishing is used the output trays move downward as the stack of paper that is output increases in quantity and thickness Once an output tray has reached its stacking limit subsequent prints are automatically delivered to the next available tray If all of the available trays have reached their stacking limits printing stops temporar ily Remove all of the output paper from the trays The trays move upward and printing resumes Chapter 2 Main parts Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Stapling Prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled Prints are stapled in the following places m If an original is placed on the glass plate Corner Staple Area Double Staple Area Upper Left Upper Right Left Side Lower Right Lower Left Right Side Upper Left hie Upper Right ti tett Side Lower Right Lower Left Right Side iE is T j m If originals are placed in the feeder Chapter 2 Main parts 37 Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Corner Staple Area r aso D4 Upper Right Upper Left pez Lower Left amp r Lower Rig
20. cccccceeeeeceeeeeeessesessssssnseeeaseeeeeees 120 Print a Scheduled job later cccccsscesssseeseeeseneeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 121 RE Print JO Dsseesesesecs iedehededsancicccadevees ccciaaadasonweeuvecinntoeniedehaeeesetaaceunanes 122 Print a JOD ticket snoeren ananin nanana aiaa a 124 Mak a DrOOf csesesccccadestescdecelsdecns deccnassinhshatviaacatebadedodecetieanteeckasecesaees 125 Stop the Printer cccccccesesssssseessseseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeessseeesseneees 126 Delete print jODS cccccssccccscceceeeceeeeeeeeceesssessseeessssneseeseeesneeeeneeeeeess 128 Schedule a waiting job for Printing cc cece eeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 130 Select more than one job for PrintiNg cssssssssssssseeceeeeeeeeeeees 131 Print a file from a USB Cr ive cccccscssseesssssneeneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 132 Media handlings censsecescccuedetedeabute neaeseeceeeremeninns 133 Introduction to the Schedule VieW cccsescsceeeeeeseeteeeeeeeeeeeee 133 Load the media using the Schedule VieW ccccceseeeeeseeeseeseeees 137 Description of the Trays ViCW s scssssssssssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 139 Load the media using the Trays ViCW cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 142 Introduction to the Media S CtION cceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 144 Introduction to the media handling cssceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 146 Add temporary medi
21. er stapler m Stacker stapler lower tray Deliver the prints at the lower tray of the stack er stapler m Stacker stapler booklet tray Deliver the prints at the booklet tray of the stack er stapler m Folder main tray Deliver the folded prints to the tray at the bottom of the folder Sort E By page The output is sorted by page The output is sorted by set Offset stack This setting is only available when the Offset stacking ing setting is set to Sets as in job in the workflow pro file On Each set delivered to an output location will have a small shift on top of the previous set This makes it easier to recognize individual sets Off All the sets or jobs that get to an output location are stacked in a straight stack 184 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Setting Values Advanced settings gt Sheet order Advanced settings gt Sheet orien tation Description p Face up Deliver the prints face up first sheet on top Face up reverse Deliver the prints face up last sheet on top Face down Deliver the prints face down first sheet on top 5 Face down reverse Deliver the prints face down last sheet on top Chapter 7 Copy jobs 185 Description of the copy job settings Setting Values Description siSY Header up LEF Deliver the prints with
22. 13 x 19 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 12 x 18 411 x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR EXEC Custom size 51 2 x 7 1 8 to 13 x 19 1 4 Chapter 2 Main parts 19 The paper module Components and their functions 1 10 The paper module Paper module components and their functions Function Front cover buffer pass Open this cover to remove jammed paper Open button Press to open the paper tray when you need to load paper or check for a paper jam Paper tray Contains the media that will be printed on mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 mLoad the media into the paper module on page 245 mAdjust the media size for the paper module on page 252 20 Chapter 2 Main parts Bulk paper modules Bulk paper modules Introduction The optional bulk paper module Paper Deck Unit A1 POD Deck Lite A1 allows you to load up to 4000 sheets of paper 64 g m 17 lb bond or 3500 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 lb bond O IMPORTANT If the printer is in Sleep mode you may not be able to open the bulk paper module In this case press the Sleep Mode key on the operator panel to reactivate the printer then press the Open button on the bulk paper module NOTE m The paper size of the Paper Deck Unit A1 is fixed to A4 or B5 LTR m The following paper sizes can load into POD Deck Lite A1 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm
23. 7 Measure the calibration sheet according to the instructions on the operator panel Perform the following actions per color m Position the spectrometer at the indicated position Hold down the spectrometer button and wait for the arrow m Scan the column with patches smoothly in about 2 seconds 8 Touch OK to save the calibration results g Select one of the following options m Touch Yes and OK to calibrate another media family halftone combination m Touch No and OK to stop the media family calibration 10 Touch Finish to finish the calibration procedure wCalibrate the printer 1 Shading correction on page 362 mCalibrate the printer 2 Auto gradation adjustment on page 364 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 367 Adjust the CMYK calibration curve manually Adjust the CMYK calibration curve manually Introduction O Calibration curves assure color consistency over different engines There is a calibration curve for each media family halftone combination The calibration curve is automatically set after calibration However you can adjust the curve manually for your specific needs IMPORTANT This setting applies to the complete media family halftone combination Adjust the CMYK calibration curve manually 1 Touch System gt Color management hw Press Edit CMYK curves manually A log in window opens Log in as key operator Select the media family hal
24. A3 B4 A4 A4R and Bs 13 x19 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 12 x 18 LL u 11 X17 LGL LTR and LTRR Chapter 2 Main parts 21 Bulk paper modules Illustration 3 3 Paper Deck Unit A1 POD Deck Lite A1 11 Available bulk paper modules Components and their functions Bulk paper module components and their functions Function Release button Press to move the paper deck away from the main unit when you want to detach it from the printer Open button Press to open the paper deck when you want to load paper or check for a paper jam Paper supply indicator Allows you to check the amount of paper remaining in the paper deck mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 mLoad the media into the bulk paper modules on page 257 mAdjust the media size for the bulk paper module on page 263 22 Chapter 2 Main parts The automatic document feeder ADF The automatic document feeder ADF Introduction The automatic document feeder ADF copies and scans sets of 1 sided and 2 sided documents automatically You can scan documents such as books thick originals thin originals and transparencies on the glass plate A CAUTION Do not put your fingers into the gaps around the original supply tray as your fingers may get caught Also be careful not to drop objects such as paper clips into the gaps Doing so may damage the printer or cause it to break d
25. B4 A4 A4R Bs BsR AsR and custom size 139 7 x 182 0 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 13 x19 12 5 8 x 1711 16 12 x 18 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR EXEC and custom size 5 x 7 1 8 to 13 x 19 1 4 Load the media into the paper module 1 Press the button on the paper tray corresponding to paper you want to load P The inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position NOTE It may take some time for the paper tray to open even after pressing the Open button Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 247 Load the media into the paper module 2 Grip the handle and pull out the paper tray until it stops 3 Open a package of paper and remove the paper stack A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper O IMPORTANT Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight NOTE m For high quality printouts use paper recommended by your authorized dealer Before loading paper always fan the sheets several times and align the edges to facilitate feeding Ci 4 Load the paper stack into the paper tray m Even out the edges of the paper stack Load the paper stack against the left wall of the paper tray 248 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the paper module m When loading paper into the paper tray f
26. Copy job Print job Truncate Job DAME asi a A 326 Turn off Printer orinis saii 98 Turn on Cotitroller s seisesssesssssedseassdaieveees edveseaseecssceasecae 96 Printer oaran re a E 97 U Unassign WASSIG Ds este set a T A 142 Urgent job WE BENE jo Dosane EERE 119 USB drive Index Print JOD se ssseieee sanded estedscessassdeseosteasessaeseadetbens 132 Save a file to another location ccccceeceeeees 132 Use a custom template Use a custom template occ 207 V Version of printer software Version of printer software s ssssessssesseseesees 328 View Maintenance view ccccccsssseessceesseeesseeesseeeees 344 WwW Warning time Change Disable Enable Waste toner container Waste toner container ccescesseeseeeseeseeeneees 299 Wire cleaning Wire cleaning i cseiiiscehedssesessscccstacastsecandiatetseey 352 Workflow profiles Check and print FUNCHON persek san skane r Ee aL ENO CARER ENNE Job by job ww Manual planning Standard cccee m Unattended ccccccccccsscessessessessessesseseesseseens Scan JOD dieran a E tncedecescdasasssaares 222 Zoom behavior Zoom behavior cccccccescescessessessessessesseseeseees 204 455 Canon CANON INC 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan CANON U S A INC One Canon Plaza Lake Success NY 11042 U S A CANON CANADA INC 6390 Dixie Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 1P7 Canada CANON EUROPA N V Bovenkerkerweg 59
27. DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEG LIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CON NECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Part 2 Networks Associates Technology Inc copyright notice BSD Chapter 13 Third party software The BSD License Copyright c 2001 2003 Networks Associates Technology Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA
28. JOD hss ievesti ET R 225 Adjust paper module Adjust paper module wo 252 Adjust paper tray Adjust paper thay sistis 243 Align Copy job veissssstisssisecstessceresstsiavsesicsusstesctevesass 182 Print JOD ei ciscciesovssapavsssnadyssiererciedsccatent evieorers 108 SCAN JOD esse er R AAEE 223 Align image media Align image media wcrc 149 Alignment AlipniMent resa n R E A 163 Assign Va a ETTE E E E 142 Auto color mismatch correction 446 Auto color mismatch correction c000 360 Automated settings Copy job Scan job Automated workflow Add asitoe 333 Delete esie A EA steer 335 Edit nieren E Ea aa 334 Restore default ccccccsccsscssessesscseesecsseeecesees 336 Automated workflows Attributes sesesessesesessesesessesesesoesesosoesesesseseses 331 Explanation sen a E 331 Automatic Document Feeder Automatic Document Feeder c ccccceeseeeees 23 Automatic document feeder Automatic document feeder cccccceseeseeee 194 Available documentation Available documentation ccccccsccssesseeeeeees 14 B Background suppression Original settings sisctdcoreissssssscnsaisitsiien 176 SCAN Jo Derr e ROR EEE 220 Basic copy BASIC COPY raegeo nae a a 201 Billing counters Billing counters iesi 357 358 Binding Copy JOD wssdesessdedisidsscosdiitesdeasechedieczsasscssastess 191 Print JOD wesritaticsiddscndissisissisdaiat tatters 115 Binding edge Binding edge senine aaa 1
29. Job name Setting Values Trims the long edge according to the specified value The minimum trim size is 2 mm Description Job name By default all print jobs are named Print job and include a sequence number To identify your copy job more easily in the list of waiting jobs or scheduled jobs you can change the name of the copy job When you touch the Job name button a keyboard appears Number of sets Setting Number of sets Page range Setting Page range 116 Chapter 6 Print jobs Description Use this setting to define the number of copies You can enter a value from 1 65 000 The default value is 1 Description When All is selected all pages of the job will be printed When Pages is selected use the From and To fields to indicate the first and last pages you want printed Description of the print job settings Separator sheets Setting Values Description Separator On When the Separator sheets setting is enabled a sepa 8 sheets rate sheet is inserted automatically before each set of a job to create a clear distinction between two sets Separator sheets are always empty In the Settings Editor select a media from the media catalog use as separator sheets You can also indicate the feed direc tion of the separator sheets long edge feed or short edge feed No separator sheet will be inserted bef
30. NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICA BLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPY RIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY Chapter 13 Third party software 433 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 434 WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possib
31. Print A ODS aene R R 131 Job parameters isisisi 124 JOD Settings es tassseis ticisscatsecssesssorsrnsaueeiauctss 124 Jobs in list of Waiting jobs wo 130 Jobs with available media Jobs with label ossessi Print a job from USB drive Print a job from USB drive sssssssssssssssssesssesse 132 Print a scheduled job later Print a scheduled job later wo eee 121 Print delivery Copy JOD aa sesseasesecasevessosedsscnssessieasensestesbesdaicess 184 Print JOD scissesscssessssscossssesssssebeseizoss sesscsessasoaces 110 Print delivery settings Offset stacking isisisi irsini icri 166 451 Index Output location ssisississsisieiisissssi isise 166 Print order Rotation Sheet order Sheet orientation c cscescseeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 166 Sort by Page sass scsesisssssessvesdiesavessievsseseseieseiers 166 SOLE Dy Seter sarte aeranta 166 Print immediately Print immediately oiricinnrissaniciess 119 Print job ior D Sid Edd ninii dbsesatisdeadsseasedstiecs heaved Aligi iiss Binding 0 Binding edge COVERS ie eerta E cesses NRT Ob settihEs pesenane Manual settings Media cseeseeeee Number of sets Page tinte acess desvcidestcsssiecasdanccetecsest eo E Petit delivery ss ess cstsed cazsazsaeeteranvin i awesseds Punching 0 Separator sheets SIUC cesen STe C P E T TOMIDA ssiiinssieiisiseisasisiiossisiisienisionisrisa Print jobs Bundle several jobs Split bu
32. Simon Pierre Cadieux Eric S Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs This library is provided with all faults and the entire risk of satisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with the user x libpng versions 0 97 January 1998 through 1 0 6 March 20 2000 are Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Glenn Randers Pehrson Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 0 96 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Tom Lane Glenn Randers Pehrson Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0 89 June 1996 through 0 96 May 1997 are Copyright c 1996 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 0 88 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner 406 Chapter 13 Third party software libpng libpng versions 0 5 May 1995 through 0 88 January 1996 are Copyright c 1995 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat Group 42 Inc For the purposes of this copyright and license Contributing Authors is
33. When you customized the settings of a workflow profile the button displays the text Custom The use of the default workflow profiles The following table makes recommendations about when to use which default workflow profile When to use which workflow Profile When to use Standard You need a productive workflow but you still want to have sufficient control over the jobs Job by job You want to start the jobs one by one Each time a job has been printed the machine goes on hold Always touch Resume in the dashboard to start the next job Check and print You want to check the quality and layout of each first set of a job before the remaining sets will be printed Manual planning The jobs are sent to the machine in a random order You can manually define the most productive order in which the machine will print the jobs Unattended You want to continue printing while you are absent for example after working hours Then the machine will print the scheduled jobs provided that all the required media supplies and output locations are available 320 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Work with the workflow profiles The default settings for Receive The default Receive settings Workflow profile Receive settings Destination of print job Destination of copy job Standard O Scheduled jobs Scheduled jobs T by Sande Scheduled jo Schedu
34. it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library Chapter 13 Third party software 429 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 430 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium cus tomarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is
35. ity alone Under this section the Commercial Contributor would have to defend claims against the other Contributors related to those performance claims and warranties and if a court requires any other Contributor to pay any damages as a result the Commercial Contributor must pay those damages 5 NO WARRANTY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDI TIONS OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITH Chapter 13 Third party software 443 COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 OUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Each Recipient is solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using and distributing the Program and assumes all risks associated with its exercise of rights under this Agreement including but not limited to the risks and costs of program errors compliance with applicable laws damage to or loss of data programs or equipment and unavailability or interruption of operations 6 DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT NEITHER RECIP IENT NOR ANY CONTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUEN TIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT
36. job separator and so on Lower tray Load paper you want to use as a cover sheet insertion job separator and so on Tray cover Lift to load paper into the lower tray Slide guides Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the original Front cover Open this cover to remove jammed paper 50 Chapter 2 Main parts Inserter mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 Chapter 2 Main parts 51 Folder Folder Introduction The optional folder Paper Folding Unit G1 allows you to fold paper in five different ways Z fold half fold tri fold in tri fold out double parallel fold This section describes the folder and the five folding methods Illustration 118 Folder Components and their functions Folder components and their functions Z fold Function Front cover Open this cover to remove jammed paper Folding unit Open this cover to remove jammed paper Exit slot Folded paper is output to this tray Paper Folding Unit G1 folds A3 B4 11 x 17 or A4R LTRR paper into A4 B5 LTR or As5 STMT respectively When you want to make multiple copies of originals with different sizes Z fold mode allows you to easily handle paper with the same leading edge length but different width Paper folded in a Z fold is output to the tray specified for the finisher 52 Chapter 2 Main parts Folder Leading Edge Length
37. m Safety Information for the controller a Material Safety Data Sheets 14 Chapter 1 Preface Chapter 2 Main parts Overview of the machine configuration Overview of the machine configuration Introduction The following figures display two example configurations 8 Extended configuration 9 Compact configuration Main unit Component Function 1 PRISMAsync controller The controller helps you set up the workflow to meet your specific needs 16 Chapter 2 Main parts Overview of the machine configuration Component Function Operator panel The operator panel helps you with your daily work for example the scheduling of the jobs Furthermore the operator panel helps you to solve errors Operator attention light The operator attention light enables you to check the status of the system from a distance The operator warning light is option al Automatic document feeder The automatic document feeder is ADF used to copy and scan sets of 1 sided Duplex Color Image Reader and 2 sided documents automatical Unit A1 ly You can scan documents such as books thick originals thin originals and transparencies on the glass plate Toner compartment cover Gives access to the toner bottles Fixing transport unit The fixing transport unit contains the components that print the media Access to the fixing transport unit is only required when a paper jam oc curs or when maintenance is re q
38. o Bi Markon a Comer staple left to 2Holepunch BC1 Fold n H ug CRA F Le 2 Pages 1 selected 1 Sheet 1 selected Page sze At 145 Lay out preparation with PRISMAprepare 2 Use the media catalog to define the media Chapter 3 Operating concept 75 Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare With PRISMAprepare you can export the media catalogue to PRISMAsync controllers of the black amp white and color systems gt RISMApre O Select Ba X o l X copy Ede Oekete Name SRA3 Top Color 350 SRA3 Top Color 200 SRA3 Top Color 160 SRAS Top Color 100 SRAI TC Phas Sik 300 SRAS TC Phas Sik 170 SRAS TC Phas Sk 115 SRAG TC Phas Gloss 300 SRAS TC Phas Gloss 170 SRAS TC Phas Gloss 115 SRA Pearl White 250 _ SRAZ Digsuiphate 250 AA T shirt Transfer 150 A4 Top Mat 60 _ A4 Top Color 250 A4 Top Color 160 A4 Top Color 100 AA TC Pro Gloss 115 A4 Poly Film White Opaque 120 AA Parchment White 150 A4 Parchment Sand 150 AA Parchment Gold 150 A4 Matt Transp Fim Self Adh 140 AA Labels White 130 AA Glossy Labels 185 A4 Colored 80 AAS Tabs Reverse 160 A3 Top Mal 60 A3 Top Color 300 A3 Top Color 200 A3 Top Color 160 A3 Top Color 100 A3 TC Pro Sik 270 A a Auuu uuu uu uuu uuu uuu aq 717737377737717 146 The media catalog in PRISMAprepare 3 Select the required color pre set or define customized color settings
39. of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation ex cluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to
40. surement 1 f Time zone System settings Short description The System settings section contains settings to change the date and time of the system or the system of measurement used When you change the system of measurement all corresponding values on the system will be changed For exam ple when you change Metric into Impe rial all values will be displayed in inches How to change key operator settings and system administrator settings via the operator panel 1 2 3 4 5 Touch the required setting Press OK 330 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Touch System gt Setup gt Local key operator settings below Advanced Touch the button of the group that contains the setting you want to change or view Look up the required information or make the required changes Introduction to automated workflows Automated workflows access through the Settings Editor Introduction to automated workflows Definition The Settings Editor enables you to set up separate automated workflows Automated workflows are print queues that you can program to perform a range of operations Auto mated workflows are mostly used for legacy applications where jobs are printed automat ically and certain settings must be set automatically Every automated workflow represents a different virtual printer with its own specific attributes The table below de
41. tising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Keith Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty KEITH PACKARD DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL KEITH PACKARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAM AGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Chapter 13 Third party software 401 The FreeType Project LICENSE The FreeType Project LICENSE 402 2006 Jan 27 Copyright 1996 2002 2006 by David Turner Robert Wilhelm and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages some of them may contain in addition to the FreeType font engine various tools and contributions which rely on or relate to the FreeType Project This license applies to all files found in such packages and which do not fall under their own explicit license The license affects thus the FreeType font engine the test programs documentation and makefiles at the very least This license was inspired by the BSD Artistic and IJG Independent JPEG Group li
42. touch Yes Chapter 6 Print jobs 129 Schedule a waiting job for printing Schedule a waiting job for printing Introduction The destination of jobs is determined by the selected workflow profile When jobs go to the list of Waiting jobs you must manually send the jobs to the print queue list of Scheduled jobs This enables you to keep full control of all jobs that must be printed How to schedule a waiting job for printing 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues If collapsed first touch to expand the desired list of Waiting jobs 3 Touch the job s you want to print or use the Select button to make a selection To undo the multiple selection and only select 1 job you must touch that job for 2 sec onds 4 Press Print The job is moved to the bottom of the list of Scheduled jobs N mWork with the workflow profiles on page 320 130 Chapter 6 Print jobs Select more than one job for printing Select more than one job for printing Introduction The table below describes the possibilities to select more than one job for printing Select more jobs Options Description Select 2 or more jobs Touch the jobs you want to print one by one manually Select button All All jobs in the list of Waiting jobs are printed The order in the list of Waiting jobs determines the print order However in the list of Scheduled jobs you can give prior ity to
43. 04 x 10 51 WxDxH Weight 1 3 kg 2 87 lbs Chapter 12 Specifications 389 Specifications 390 Chapter 12 Specifications Chapter 13 Third party software Third Party Software Third Party Software This Canon product the PRODUCT includes third party software modules Use and distribution of these software modules the SOFTWARE are subject to the conditions below 1 You agree that you will comply with any applicable export control laws restrictions or regulations of the countries involved in the event that this product including the SOFTWARE is shipped transferred or exported into any country 2 Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the title ownership and in tellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE Except as expressly provided herein no license or right expressed or implied is hereby conveyed or granted by rights holders of the SOFTWARE to you for any intellectual property of rights holders of the SOFT WARE 3 You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the PRODUCT 4 You may not assign sublicense market distribute or transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior written consent of rights holders of the SOFTWARE 5 Notwithstanding the foregoing you may transfer the SOFTWARE only when a you assign to a transferee all of your rights to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations under the conditions governing the SOFTWARE and PRODUCT and
44. 11 16 320 x 450 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R B4 Bs B5R A5R LGL LTR LTRR EXEC Custom size 139 7x 182 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 5 5 X 7 17 to 13 x 19 20 Paper weight 52 300 g m 14 lb bond 110 lb cover Dimensions unit Wx 950x797 x 1040 mm Dx H 37 40 x 31 38 x 40 95 Weight unit 150 kg 330 lbs Power consumption Approximately 753 W Features Paper level indication visual Automatic tray opening Power requirement 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Bulk paper module POD Deck Lite A1 Specification Description Optional single tray paper input module Paper trays 1 x 3500 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond Paper sizes 13 x19 330 x 483 mm 12 x 18 305 x 457 mm 11 X 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 320 x 450 mm SRA3 A3 A4 A4R B4 B5 LGL LTR LTRR Paper weight 52 300 g m 14 lb bond 110 lb cover 380 Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Specification Value Paper feed technology Friction feed Air separation Dimensions unit Wx 601 x 621 x 570 mm Dx H 23 66 x 24 25 x 22 44 Bulk paper module Paper Deck Unit A1 Specification Value ee sSY Paper weight 52 220 g m 14 lb bond 80 lb cover Dx H 12 72 X 22 95 X 22 44 Special feeder Multi Purpose Tray Specification Value Description Standard part of main engine Not accessible when Multi Drawer Paper Deck is connect ed Paper capacity 100 she
45. 110 lb cover Textured 4 257 to 300 g m 100 lb cover to 110 lb cover Tracing paper transparencies prepunched paper labels or envelopes NOTE Punching is available only if Puncher Unit BG1 BH1 BF1 is attached m When Puncher Unit BG1 is attached holes can be punched into the following paper sizes Two holes A3 A4 and A4R Four holes A3 and A4 m When Puncher Unit BH1 is attached you can punch holes into the following paper sizes Four holes A3 A4 and A4R m When Puncher Unit BF1 is attached you can punch holes into the following paper sizes A3 and A4 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR and EXEC Saddle folding Saddle folding allows you to fold multiple sheets in 2 folds 42 Chapter 2 Main parts Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Originals Copies EGS S R er D z 26 4 E i The paper is saddle folded with a maximum of 5 sheets IMPORTANT m Saddle folding is available only if Booklet Finisher A1 is attached m The paper is saddle folded with a maximum of 5 sheets 80 g m 20 lb Bond and then output NOTE You cannot saddle fold tracing paper transparencies prepunched paper tab paper 1 tab paper 2 labels or envelopes m The paper sizes that can be saddle folded are 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm A3 B4 A4R
46. 5 35 0 11X17 3 370 Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Specification Size Color Uncoated 106 220 g m 29 lb bond 82 lb cover Uncoated 221 300 g m 83 110 lb cover Only via POD deck lite Multi drawer deck Coated Quality mode 106 300 g m 28 lb bond 110 lb cover Only via POD deck lite Multi drawer deck 2 sided supports up to 220 g m 82 lb bond Coated Productivity mode 106 180 g m 28 lb bond 66 lb cover Only via POD deck lite Multi drawer deck 1 sided Feeding from cas sette or deck 2 sided Feeding from cas sette or deck B amp W Color 35 0 37 5 35 0 37 5 DR ANTER 17 5 18 7 17 5 18 7 11X17 a ee 23 3 LTR aa a fa A4R LTRR A3 17 5 18 7 17 5 18 7 11X17 Chapter 12 Specifications 371 Specifications Specification 1 sided 2 sided Feeding from cas Feeding from cas sette or deck sette or deck Size E Color Coated Productivity mode a 181 300 g m R LTRR za ar 67 lb bond 110 lb 10 5 17 5 17 0 1 cover 11 6 Only via POD deck 11x17 lite Multi drawer PENR deck 2 sided supports up 3 19 Tag to 220 g m 82 lb bond FPOT 8 seconds Copy speed with automatic document First set 45 ipm simplex 44 ipm duplex feeder Following sets output at full engine speed FECOT FFCOT sts seconds from glass plate Print speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9065S PRO 1 sided 2 sided Feeding
47. 7 Copy jobs 201 Combine subsets into 1 document Combine subsets into 1 document Introduction A subset is an original you want to copy A subset can be a single sheet or a full document Each subset can require different settings for the original and the output To create 1 document from several subsets you can use the Combined copy job template in the Copy Scan section You also need this template when you want to use tab sheets to split up the subsets Then each tab sheet is also considered to be a subset After you created 1 document you can still add insert delete or edit a subset How to combine subsets into 1 document 202 oN AN PY bP H Place the first subset face up into the ADF Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Combined copy job Define the settings for the subset both in the Original and Output section Press Place the next subset face up into the ADF Repeat the steps 3 4 for all subsequent subsets Touch Ready after you scanned the last subset Touch to start the copy job or touch Edit to check the document first or to add insert or delete a subset Chapter 7 Copy jobs Access other functions during a copy job or scan job Access other functions during a copy job or scan job Introduction When you access the copy function or scan function from the Copy Scan view the job window opens in full screen mode Therefore the buttons that give a
48. 85 Weight 71 kg 156 5 lbs Power require From the staple finisher and stacker stapler ment Power Con Approximately 132 W sumption Puncher Professional Puncher C1 Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 Specification Value Description Punch unit with user replaceable dies for plastic comb twin loop color coil pro click velo and ring binding Paper weight Paper size Uncoated paper 75 216 g m 20 lb bond 80 lb cover Coated paper 120 216 g m 32 lb bond 8o lb cover Exact specifications depend on die set EU A4 A4 tabs US LTR LTR tab Chapter 12 Specifications 387 Specifications Specification Value Punch waste tray capacity Dimensions WxDxH Power require ment Power Con sumption Varies by die set type Max 25 000 sheets 4 hole die set 80g m 20 lb bond 305 X 792 x 1040 mm 12 x 31 18 x 40 94 Professional Puncher C1 250 X 792 x 1040 mm 9 84 x 31 18 x 40 94 Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 80 kg 176 lbs Professional Puncher C1 40 kg 88 lbs Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 EUR 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 1 A Professional Puncher Inte gration Unit B1 US 120 127 VAC 60 Hz 5 5 A Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 Professional Puncher C1 takes power from Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 Approximately 130 W Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 Approxima
49. Contributor under this Agreement whether expressly by implication estoppel or other wise All rights in the Program not expressly granted under this Agreement are reserved This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of New York and the intellectual property laws of the United States of America No party to this Agreement will bring a legal action under this Agreement more than one year after the cause of action arose Each party waives its rights to a jury trial in any resulting litigation Chapter 13 Third party software 445 Index 1 or 2 sided COPY OD iss scec chavs st esscctarecavepstedesUerscacousssvstbiers 177 Original SettiOg sisecersessesessersceserseoesiostsosees 174 PEE JOD aE AEE 105 SCA JOD NE EAE 218 1 Sided printing Sided printing sssessssersessodetsestbescecscnsszscresiers 159 2 Sided printing 2 Sided Printing eir erreia nEn 159 A Access other functions during copy job or scan job Access other functions during copy job or scan job Add Automated workflow sssssssesssssessessesresesseess 333 Add temporary media to the Media catalog Add temporary media to the Media catalog 148 Add toner Add tonen sessisssseciesssassssetiestiesevasesasvesecseaesaters 301 ADF ADE rroa E AA Cleaning ADF rollers ADF rollers iisisssssssesssisesseiscestescensssibacoeseansess 354 Adjust image Adjust image ssie a nren 212 Copy JOD ssvsvsessscerasisasosecuverdcstavedeserieocssovatetees 187 SCAN
50. Each printed job that is delivered to an output lo cation is stacked on top of the previous printed job with an offset This helps you to identify the various jobs Each printed set that is delivered to an output lo cation is stacked on top of the previous set with an offset This helps you to identify the various sets Sets as in job Each printed set is delivered to the output location as defined in the job ticket or copy job Therefore the sets can be stacked in one straight line or with an offset Off Each banner page of a job is delivered to the out put location with an offset This helps you to identify the separate jobs The jobs themselves are stacked in one straight line All the printed jobs or sets are stacked in one straight line There is no offset between the jobs or sets Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 323 Change the warning time Change the warning time Introduction When operator interaction is required now or soon the dashboard and the operator at tention light can warn you This is a trigger that action is required now or soon for ex ample load a required media type or empty an output location You can define how long in advance the warning message is displayed By factory default the function Warning in advance is enabled and set to 10 minutes Then the dashboard starts to display the warning 10 minutes before an action becomes inevitable
51. INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED HERE UNDER EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 7 GENERAL 444 If any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this Agree ment and without further action by the parties hereto such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable If Recipient institutes patent litigation against a Contributor with respect to a patent ap plicable to software including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit then any patent licenses granted by that Contributor to such Recipient under this Agreement shall termi nate as of the date such litigation is filed In addition if Recipient institutes patent litiga tion against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Program itself excluding combinations of the Program with other software or hard ware infringes such Recipient s patent s then such Recipient s rights granted under Section 2 b shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed All Recipient s rights under this Agreement shall terminate if it fails to comply with any of the material terms or conditions of this Agreement and does not cure such failure in a reasonable p
52. If you do not respond to the warning message the printer will stop Depending on the urgency of the warning message the vertical bar in the dashboard and the operator attention light are orange or red NOTE m The operator attention light is linked to the status of the machine For example when the dashboard displays an orange warning the orange light of the operator attention light also lights up m You can only change the warning time when the Warning in advance function is enabled How to change the warning time 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Warning time 2 Touch the or button to decrease or increase the warning time in steps of 1 minute You can set a time from 1 6o minutes 3 Press OK mThe dashboard on page 84 mThe operator attention light on page 30 324 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Disable the warning time Disable the warning time Introduction When operator interaction is required now or soon the dashboard and the operator at tention light warn you However you can disable this warning function Disable the warning time 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Warning time under Operator panel When the box for Warning in advance has a check mark and states On the function is enabled 2 Touch the Warning in advance button The check mark disappears The status On changes into Off 3 Press OK mThe dashboard on
53. PRISMAsync controller Go to the Workflow gt Hotfolders section Click Configure At Enabled select Yes to activate the hotfolder function Enter a unique Hotfolder user name and Hotfolder password Make sure that you filled in the user name and password before you continue with the next step Click OK to confirm the activation of the hotfolder function A confirmation window opens Click OK to restart the controller now 338 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Create a hotfolder Create a hotfolder Introduction P The information in this section is intended for key operators NOTE m You can create up to 10 hotfolders m For this procedure the Key operator PIN is required Before you begin The hotfolder function must be activated Otherwise the system administrator must ac tivate the hotfolder function first How to create a hotfolder 1 Aan fw DN Open your web browser and enter the host name or IP address of your PRISMAsync controller Go to the Workflow gt Hotfolders section Click Add Give the hotfolder a logical name Select the workflow folder to which you want to link Click OK Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 339 Create a shared network folder on a workstation Create a shared network folder on a workstation Introduction The information in this section is intended f
54. PROFITS HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED HERE UNDER EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 7 GENERAL If any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this Agree ment and without further action by the parties hereto such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable If Recipient institutes patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Program itself excluding combinations of the Program with other software or hardware infringes such Recipient s patent s then such Recipient s rights granted under Section 2 b shall terminate as of the date such lit igation is filed All Recipient s rights under this Agreement shall terminate if it fails to comply with any of the material terms or conditions of this Agreement and does not cure such failure in a reasonable period of time after becoming aware of such noncompliance If all Recipient s rights under this Agreement terminate Recipient agrees to cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable However Recipient s obl
55. System gt Media 2 From the Media catalog select the media you want to register 3 Press Registration An instruction windows opens Chapter 6 Print jobs 149 Perform a media registration 4 Read the instructions carefully and touch Next Please wait while a media registration sheet is printed 5 Check the media registration chart m Ifthe media registration sheet is correct you can stop the media registration procedure m Ifthe media registration sheet is wrong continue with the next step An instruction window opens 6 Follow the instructions on the window 7 Press Finish 8 Repeat step 1 5 to check the result 150 Chapter 6 Print jobs Change the number of sets Change the job settings before printing Change the number of sets Introduction Follow the procedure below to change the number of sets for a job that is present in the list of Waiting jobs or Scheduled jobs How to change the number of sets 1 Touch gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job of which you want to change the number of sets You can only change the settings of the active print job amp after you stopped the printer press the Stop button two times Touch Properties or touch the job two times to open the Properties window Touch the Number of sets button 5 Enter the desired number of sets between 1 and 65 000 A Ww NOTE Touch the arrow button lt t
56. Then touch the Stop after job A horizontal red and white stop bar indicates that the stop after job function is active The printer stops when the selected job is complet ed You must touch the Resume button to resume printing When you print streaming jobs 4 or jobs that consist of 1 large set you must press E two times to stop the printer as soon as possible Stop the printer automatically Automatic stop The Check first set setting in a The printer stops each time the first set Workflow profile is On and of a print job is completed You can check The Check first set setting is also en the first set before you continue the print abled in the job job The Confirm start of job setting in a The printer stops each time at the start Workflow profile is On of a new job You must start each job manually How to stop and continue printing manually 1 Press amp button one time to stop when the current set is completed 2 Press E button two times to stop as soon as possible 3 To resume printing press Ml in the dashboard NOTE To stop printing after a job you must select a job in Jobs gt Queues gt Scheduled jobs Then you must touch the Stop after job button Chapter 6 Print jobs 127 Delete print jobs Delete print jobs Locations from which jobs can be deleted You can delete jobs from the following locations m List of Printed jobs
57. Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or ver tically By default the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical If you want to define a different value for each side press The icon changes to the unlocked status Now you can define the values for the front side and the back side separately Description of the scan job settings File settings Adjust image Setting Description Adjustim Describe The Adjust Image setting allows you to define the age original copy and scan quality manually Depending on the Describe situation you can describe the original or copy scan copy m Ifthe original is unsatisfactory enter a description m Ifthe original is OK but you want a different copy or scan describe the copy Brightness With the Brightness setting you can darken 1 to 3 or lighten 1 3 your print Contrast With the Contrast setting you can change the differ ences between dark and light areas on your print A negative value reduces the difference a positive value increases the difference Color With the Color setting describe the color of the original or copy Chapter 8 Scan jobs 225 Description of the scan job settings File settings Color Black amp white Setting Values Description Color Black Colors amp O amp
58. When you use the special feeder to make copies straighten curled paper prior to use as shown below Curled paper may cause a paper jam _ Feeding Direction To print on the back of preprinted paper straighten curled paper and load the preprinted paper face up into the special feeder as shown in the illustration below A H Output Direction lt Feeding Direction After the first one sided When copying on the back copy is made side of a preprinted sheet 280 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the special feeder multipurpose tray IMPORTANT m When loading paper into the special feeder align the paper stack neatly between the slide guides If the paper is not loaded correctly a paper jam may occur m When loading paper into the special feeder make sure the paper is placed down flat The paper may not be able to be fed if the slide guides are set to a size smaller than the paper causing it to curve upward m Ifyou are printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes using the special feeder and find that the paper or envelopes are not being fed smoothly or evenly through the special feeder remove the paper or envelopes curl the feeding edges upward ap proximately 3mm 1 8 then reload the paper or envelopes Curling the feeding edges enables the rollers to grip the pa
59. a job Select button Jobs All jobs for which the required media are currently available with available media in the paper trays will be printed This improves the pro ductivity because you must not change the required media during printing You may only need to add more of the currently available media types Select button Jobs with label A label is a name or tag that helps you to identify certain jobs on the operator panel When a job is sent to the printer the person who submits the job can add a label to that job The label can be any name that helps to identify certain jobs A label is not connected to job settings The label can be defined in the printer driver in a job ticket or via an automated workflow For example the label Cus tomer XYZ can be added to jobs Then you can select and print all the jobs for Customer XYZ at once How to select more than one job for printing 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues 2 If collapsed first touch to expand the desired list of Waiting jobs 3 Touch the jobs you want to print one by one or make a selection using the Select button The selected jobs are highlighted 4 Press Print Chapter 6 Print jobs 131 Print a file from a USB drive Print a file from a USB drive Introduction You can print documents pdf ps on a USB drive How to print a file from a USB drive Insert the USB drive
60. base plate Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 263 Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module 5 Remove the two blue screws on the outer size change plate using a coin or something similar O IMPORTANT Do not loosen or remove any screw other than the two blue screws on the outer size change plate 6 Remove the outer size change plate i 264 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module 7 Align the outer size change plate with the marks for the desired paper size that you want to load O IMPORTANT m Make sure to align the outer size change plate with the marks for the desired paper size There are two locations with marks for the paper size on the top of the outer size change plate Align the outer size change plate with the desired marks m Make sure that the size change plate is properly aligned with the marks for the desired paper size If the size change plate is not properly aligned Pod Deck Lite may become damaged 8 Fix the outer size change plate with the two blue screws using a coin or something similar while slightly holding its centre front portion and pressing it towards you m Fix the screws by turning them clockwise m Fasten the left blue screw before fastening the right blue screw Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 265 Adjust the media size for t
61. censes which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike As a consequence its main points are that m We don t promise that this software works However we will be interested in any kind of bug reports as is distribution m You can use this software for whatever you want in parts or full form without having to pay us royalty free usage m You may not pretend that you wrote this software If you use it or only parts of it in a program you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code credits We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software with or without modifications in commercial products We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project Finally many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit disclaimer to use in com pliance with this license We thus encourage you to use the following text wit Portions of this software are copyright lt year gt The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved wey Please replace lt year gt with the value from the FreeType version you actually use Chapter 13 Third party software The FreeType Project LICENSE Legal Terms Throughout this license the terms package FreeType Project and FreeType archive refer to the set of files originally distribu
62. custom size 210 0 x 279 3 mm to 297 0 x 487 7 mm or custom size 297 1 x 279 3 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 13 x 19 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 12 x 18 11 x 17 LGL LTRR custom size 8 1 4 x 11 to 11 3 4 x 19 1 4 or custom size 11 3 4 x 11 to 13 x 19 1 4 Trimming Trimming allows you to trim the edges of the printed sheets The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output trays of the machine However some paper sizes may not be output depending on the set functions IMPORTANT m Trimming is available only if Inner Booklet Trimmer A1 is attached to Booklet Finisher A1 m You cannot trim heavy paper 210 to 300 g m 111 lb index to 110 lb cover textured paper coated paper 210 to 300 g m 111 lb index to 110 lb cover tracing paper transparencies prepunched paper tab 1 tab 2 labels or envelopes Chapter 2 Main parts 43 Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit NOTE The paper sizes that can be trimmed are 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm A3 B4 A4R or custom size 210 0 x 279 3 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 13 x 19 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 12 x 18 11 x 17 LGL LTRR or custom size 8 1 4 x 11 to 13 x 19 1 4 The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output trays of the machine However some paper sizes may not be output depending on the set functions Paper size Output tray Middle Lower Booklet tray 330 x 483 mm 30
63. displays the parame ters of the media that are currently in the paper trays The parameters are a combination of icons and texts Assign button Assign media from the media catalog to the paper tray Unassign button Unassign media from the paper tray Arrow buttons When your configuration contains more paper modules or an inserter than the Trays view can display in 1 screen you can press the arrow buttons to change the part of the machine displayed The paper tray information 140 The Trays view displays the following textual information for each paper tray m The media name for example Normal paper The media size for example A4 or Letter The media weight for example 80 g or 20 lb bond The media color The special characteristics of the media for example cyclic or punched In brackets additional information is given about these media for example the cycle count or the number of holes for punched media The Trays view displays the following icons for each paper tray The meaning of the icons Description The paper tray is empty The paper tray is full NOTE Each line indicates the presence of about 100 sheets The paper tray is too full Please remove sheets from the stack The plate inside the paper tray is down Chapter 6 Print jobs Description of the Trays view Icon Description i o The p
64. drum Drum cleaning cannot be performed during printing Clean the drum 1 Touch System gt Maintenance 2 Press Start maintenance 3 Touch Clean the drum and touch Start A wizard opens 4 Touch Next A status message displays 5 Press Finish 6 Touch Stop to close the Maintenance tasks menu Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 355 Clean the operator panel Clean the operator panel 1 Clean the screen of the operator panel with a 50 mix of water and isopropyl alcohol K2 Use a lint free cloth Always put the cleaner onto the cloth and not directly on the screen 356 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Reset the day counters Maintenance Reset the day counters Introduction The Maintenance section of the System view displays 2 types of counters a Billing counters Day counters These counters provide information about the number of sheets that have been printed This section first describes the 2 counters in the Maintenance section and how to reset the day counters Reset the day counters 1 On the operator panel press the System button 2 Press Maintenance 3 Touch the Reset day counters button in the Day counters section A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you really want to reset the day counters 4 Touch Yes to reset the day counters to o Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 357 Fi
65. express and implied including warranties or conditions of title and non infringement and implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose ii effectively excludes on behalf of all Contributors all liability for damages including direct indirect special incidental and consequential damages such as lost profits iii states that any provisions which differ from this Agreement are offered by that Con tributor alone and not by any other party and iv states that source code for the Program is available from such Contributor and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange When the Program is made available in source code form a it must be made available under this Agreement and b a copy of this Agreement must be included with each copy of the Program Contributors may not remove or alter any copyright notices contained within the Program Chapter 13 Third party software 437 Eclipse Public License v 1 0 Each Contributor must identify itself as the originator of its Contribution if any in a manner that reasonably allows subsequent Recipients to identify the originator of the Contribution 4 COMMERCIAL DISTRIBUTION Commercial distributors of software may accept certain responsibilities with respect to end users business partners and the like While this license is intended to facilitate the commercial
66. for Puncher Unit BG1 BH1 The Puncher Unit BG1 BH1 is not available for US region Punch unit US Puncher Unit BF1 2 3 holes US Specification Value Description Optional built in 2 or 3 hole punch unit Paper weight 52 256 g m 14 lb bond 95 lb cover no transparencies Paper size 2 holes LGL LTRR 3 holes 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm LTR EXEC Power require From the finisher or stacker stapler ment Power Con Approximately 56 W when in operation sumption Staple finisher and stacker stapler Chapter 12 Specifications 385 Specifications Inserter Document Insertion Unit H1 Specification Description VEIT Optional sheet and cover insertion unit Capacity 2 x 200 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond Paper weight Paper size 52 300 g m 14 lb bond 110 lb cover For inserts A4 A4R A3 SRA3 B4R Bs B5R 13 x 19 330 X 483 mm 12 x 18 305 x 457 mm 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm LGLR LTR LTRR EXEC Custom sizes 182 x 182 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 7 17 X7 17 to 13 x 19 2 Pass through mode All paper sizes supported by the main engine For inserts Thin paper 5 2 63 g m 14 lb bond 16 lb bond Plain paper 64 105 g m 17 lb bond 28 lb bond recycled paper thick paper 106 300 g m 29 lb bond 110 lb Cover coated paper 106 300 g m 29 lb bond 110 lb cover colored paper tabs textured paper bond paper prepunched paper letterhead tracing
67. for optimal print quality m Select Office documents to print the Microsoft Office documents The Microsoft Office documents use the RGB color space m Select Photographic content to print documents from photo editing or layout appli cations These documents use the CMYK color space 4 Define the required finishing options Please refer to the online help of PRISMAprepare for detailed information 76 Chapter 3 Operating concept Prepare print jobs with the printer driver Prepare print jobs with the printer driver Introduction The printer driver enables you to prepare the print job completely The printer driver appears in all applications running in the Microsoft Windows or Apple Mac OS operating systems This procedure describes the most important settings for daily use Prepare print jobs with the printer driver 1 Use the media catalog to select the media to print on amp imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO PS US Printing Preferences 2 x Advanced Job Printer Document size AA TS Media Printer default From catalog A4 Top Mail 60 44 60 g m2 Thin Whit C A4 Top Mail 60 44 60 g m2 Thin White A4 Top Color 100 44 100 g m2 Top Color White A4 Top Color 160 44 160 g m2 Top Color White A4 Top Color 250 44 100 g m2 Top Color White A4 Colored 80 44 80 g m2 Colored paper Red A4 TC Pro Gloss 115 44 115 g m2 Digital Coated Wh
68. for printing and copying Streaming spool while RIP while print while clean up unlimited job length at constant print speed via clean up while printing Multiple standard and customizable workflow profiles Media based operation with PRISMA media catalog Web based controller Settings Editor Professional high speed color management with Adobe ACE color management module and dedicated GPU calibration per media family and halftone spot color editing with CMYK value definition for spot color tints unlimited color preset definition for easy and time sav ing reuse Options Scheduler on operating panel 8 hours plan ahead functionality for simultaneous jobs Workflow automation using LPR queues and PDF PS hot folders External Operating system Windows XPE SP3 Processor Intel Core i7 GPU Memory NVIDIA GeForce GTS 450 4 GB Hard disk 3 x 3 5 SATA II 250 GB 7200 rpm Interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base T TCP IP LPR LPD 9100 Socket SMB Static IP Auto IP DHCP Page Description Lan guage Protocols Adobe PostScript 3 3019 PDF 1 7 Extension Level 3 for Acrobat 9 PDF X Optimized PS Optimized PDF SNMP v1 v2c v3 Host Resources MIB System Group MIB II Printer MIB Job Monitor MIB LDAP Chapter 12 Specifications 377 Specifications 378 Specification Fonts VEIG m 136 Type1 fonts for Romance languages m User import of PS fonts through Sett
69. if this function is enabled in the Settings Editor m List of Scheduled jobs m List of Waiting jobs You can only delete the active print job in the list of Scheduled jobs when the printer is on hold Select the jobs you want to delete The table below describes your options to select one or more jobs Select one or more jobs that you want to delete What to delete One or more separate jobs All jobs Jobs with available me Go to the correct location then touch Select gt Jobs with dia available media Jobs with label How to do Go to the correct location described above then touch the jobs one by one Go to the correct location then touch Select gt All Go to the correct location then touch Select gt Jobs with label NOTE For the list of Printed jobs you can indicate in the Settings Editor that the list must be cleaned automatically at specified times The factory default is 1 day How to delete the jobs 1 Go to one of the following locations m Touch Jobs gt Queues If collapsed first touch to expand the list of Scheduled jobs or Waiting jobs Touch Jobs gt Printed jobs 2 Select the jobs you want to delete 128 Chapter 6 Print jobs Delete print jobs 3 Press Delete A message appears 4 When you are sure that you want to delete the selected job s
70. jobs List of Scheduled jobs i e 128 List of Waiting jobs wo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 128 New ODS isi sesies sasiisscsesescds savcsssidndsvieevevieslevedeis 128 One by one spanim anasi 128 Printed Jobs sinrin 128 Destination Copy OD ssrtatiidiatordicastionanaiiiieen 192 DHCP DHOP csstesstess casech tare iii eris oi si a ass 328 Disable Warning HIE s ississricesisrisrisriairaiss 325 DNS suffix follows domain DNS suffix follows domain ssssssseeeeseeeeeee 328 Document Insertion Unit H1 Document Insertion Unit H1 wee 49 Load media isissi2iticieiicsiesetsteatisanieestieaets 272 Double parallel fold Double parallel fold wo 52 Drum Cleo sa a RE E EE 355 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit A1 CCAIR ssiccsspatessedssvecesbicvedsdeavsecedeaeetes 347 348 E Edit Automated workflow c ccccccccesscesssesseeseeeeees 334 Envelopes Envelopes eriein ern n EK 278 Error diffusion Error diffusion c cccccccccsscesscsecssessseesseesseeees 366 F Feeder Peed et ormaz a ENE ERSE 23 Cleaning siii ioiii iiias 348 File type Scan JOD sississeiesssasessitesecsssassdassessescescsasisaiaces 221 Fine Pine acest EE PP E E E EEE 366 Finishing method Finishing method ssssrissessersireirsisesrissrrene 168 Folding Copy job Print job G Glass plate Glass plate sissies 23 197 Cleaning sieg a 347 Grayscale Scan OD atitisscisessissi casts E Ar 226 H Half fold Ma etl 1e EIE A EEE 52 Host name Host Name saa a a IO 328 Hotfol
71. mismatch correction 1 2 3 Result Touch System gt Maintenance Press Start maintenance Touch Auto color mismatch correction and touch Start A wizard opens Press Next A status message displays Press Finish Touch Stop to close the Maintenance tasks menu If the procedure displays an engine error contact your local service representative 360 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Introduction to printer calibration Calibration Introduction to printer calibration Introduction Due to external environmental circumstances like temperature and humidity consumables and print quality change over time These changes effect the color quality of the printed documents Although the printer performs automatic adjustments on a regular basis you are advised to calibrate the printer configuration regularly IMPORTANT To assure optimal print quality you must perform and complete all main steps in the described order The calibration procedure will guide you through these steps automatically Calibrate the printer 1 Calibrate the printer 1 Shading correction on page 362 2 Calibrate the printer 2 Auto gradation adjustment on page 364 3 Calibrate the controller 3 Media family calibration on page 366 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 361 Calibrate the printer 1 Shading correction Calibrate the printer
72. module e 263 Load the media into the inSertel c cssssccscsececeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseees 272 Load the media into the special feeder multipurpose tray 278 Loading tranSparencies cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeeeas 285 Loading t b papeleria aaa nene aa Anania aa EENEN 287 Load tab paper into the paper tray ccsccsssscccceceeceeeeeeeeeesseeeseees 289 Removing paper WASTE cccssccesseeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseesssseessseneaneeeed 292 Check the status of the punch waste DOX cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 292 Remove the punch waste of the punch Uniit ccesssseeeeeeeees 293 Remove the tri WaStC cccccccecceeesceesseseessenseneeeeauseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 296 TONG Wants sivas seaes Secwnus cn ctculed st esuledee lt waxtvaudeiuddd t s stwetbessuandeathdvecsa a tu este haceweens 299 Check the status of the toner reservoir and waste toner container 299 Replace the toner CartridQe ccccccessececceeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeas 301 Staple Srina a a a a aa aa aaa AAE aa EE AAEE 306 Check the status of the staple CartridQes e ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teeta 306 Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler Unit s00eeeee 308 Replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit 0 312 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your N G scessssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneenees 317 System s
73. much as this may damage the original or break the machine m Ifthe document feed scanning area is dirty documents may not be scanned clearly and the size of the document may not be detected correctly NOTE This procedure is necessary only if Duplex Color Image Reader Unit A1 is attached Clean the ADF 1 Open the feeder 348 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Clean the automatic document feeder ADF 2 Clean the original scanning area thin glass strip with a cloth dampened in water or a mild detergent then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth O IMPORTANT Open the document scan cover carefully making sure not to scratch the glass plate 4 Open the inside cover Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 349 Clean the automatic document feeder ADF 5 Clean the feed scanning area with a cloth dampened in water or a mild detergent then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth When closing the inside cover be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury 350 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Clean the automatic document feeder ADF A CAUTION When closing the document scan cover be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Close the feeder A CAUTION m When closing the feeder be
74. next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate Repeat the steps 4 6 for all other subsets NOTE A number indicates the order in which the subsets have been scanned When all subsets have been scanned Touch Ready A full overview of all the scanned subsets appears in the right hand pane If required you can still adapt the job m Add another subset see below m Insert a subset see below Delete a subset see below Edit a subset see below When the job is OK start the creation of the file see below Add a subset 1 Place the first subset face up into the ADF or face down on the glass plate A Ww In the preview pane touch Add The settings pane becomes available Define the settings for the new subset Touch the Start button The new subset is added to the end of the list of subsets Repeat the steps 3 and 4 if you want to add more subsets or touch Ready when all the additional subsets have been scanned The full overview of all the scanned subsets appears When the job is OK start the creation of the file see below 230 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Combine subsets into one file Insert a subset 1 Put the first subset face up into the automatic document feeder or face down on the glass plate 2 In the preview pane select the subset below the position where you want to insert a subset 3 Press Insert The settings pane beco
75. now requires a media that is not available in the paper trays m The Schedule displays an orange bar next to a required media The orange bar indi cates that a scheduled job requires media which is either not available in the paper trays or which is available but not in sufficient quantity to finish the job m The current job requires more of the same media than is currently loaded in the paper trays You can add more of the required media into another paper tray m You already want to load and assign media that are required for the next job work ahead Load the media using the Schedule view 1 Press Schedule 2 At Required media select the media you want to load 3 Press Load The operator panel indicates how much media to load for the scheduled jobs 4 Touch the tray where you want to load the media You can select more than one tray 5 Touch OK to confirm 6 Load the media as described in one of the following references Load the media into the integrated paper trays on page 237 Load the media into the paper module on page 245 Load the media into the bulk paper modules on page 257 Chapter 6 Print jobs 137 Load the media using the Schedule view Result NOTE m The printer continues printing automatically after closing the paper tray m To load media in a grayed out paper tray you can open the paper tray and load the media mDescription of the Trays view on
76. oss fabasoft com Author Bernhard Penz lt bernhard penz fabasoft com gt Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG or any of its subsidiaries brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission Chapter 13 Third party software The BSD License THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS ORIMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDEN TAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING I
77. page 84 mThe operator attention light on page 30 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 325 Truncate the job name Truncate the job name Introduction In the Jobs view the operator panel displays all jobs with their job names Ifa job name is too long the systems truncates the job name To enable you to identify your jobs in the lists more easily you can define how the system truncates the job names This allows you to keep the identifying part of the job name You can choose to truncate the job name at the beginning or at the end of the name How to truncate the job name Touch System gt Setup gt Job name truncation under Operator panel For Truncate job name at select Beginning or End 1 2 3 Touch the or button to indicate the number of characters before truncation 4 Press OK 326 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Adjust the brightness and contrast of the operator panel Adjust the brightness and contrast of the operator panel Introduction You can adjust the brightness and contrast of your monitor to improve the readability of the operator panel The required brightness and contrast settings can depend on the lighting in your room for example Setting Description Auto adjust The screen of the operator panel will automatically set the correct ratio of brightness and contrast Brightness You can increase or
78. paper tray back into the printer until it clicks into place in the closed position A CAUTION When returning the paper drawer to its original position be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury IMPORTANT m Never place paper or any other items into the open part of the paper drawer next to the paper stack Doing so may cause a paper jam m When you are not loading tab paper make sure to return the tab paper guide to its holder m Using the tab paper guide for storing paper other than tab paper may cause a paper jam Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 291 Check the status of the punch waste box Removing paper waste Check the status of the punch waste box Introduction You can check the status of the punch waste box in the System view Check the status of the punch waste box 1 On the operator panel touch the button for the System view 2 Press Printer The status of the punch waste box displays at the right hand side of the operator panel mThe dashboard on page 84 292 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Remove the punch waste of the punch unit Remove the punch waste of the punch unit Introduction This section describes how to remove the punch waste O IMPORTANT m Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine When an optional unit s cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge
79. programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License Chapter 13 Third party software 425 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 426 Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanat
80. stack into the paper drawer Even out the edges of the paper stack Load the paper stack against the right wall of the paper drawer 240 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the integrated paper trays O IMPORTANT m Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use m Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark at the back of the paper drawer NOTE m The right and left paper drawers hold approximately 1250 sheets 64 g m 17 lb bond or 1100 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond m Paper drawers 3 and 4 hold approximately 680 sheets 64 g m 17 lb bond or 550 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond m If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load follow those instructions When paper is loaded into the paper drawer the side facing down is the one printed on m If problems occur such as poor print quality or paper jams try turning the paper stack over and reload it 5 Gently push the paper tray back into the printer until it clicks into place in the closed position Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 241 Load the media into the integrated paper trays 242 A CAUTION When returning the paper drawer to its original position be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury I
81. standard paper trays air separation Paper weight 52 300 g m 14 lb bond 110 lb cover Paper size AsR A4 A4R A3 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 320 x 450 mm SRA3 B4 B5 B5R LGL LTR LTRR EXEC 13 x19 330x483 mm 12 x 18 305 x 457mm 11 x17 279 X 432 mm 4 pane postcard envelopes ISO B5 ISO C5 DL Com1o Monarch Custom sizes 100 x 148 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 3 94 x 5 83 to 13 x 19 20 Media Plain paper Coated paper Recycled paper Colored paper Textured paper Tabs Punched paper Transparencies Labels Postcards special media such as envelopes Features Double sheet detection Paper level indication visual Automatic tray opening Automatic paper size detection Standard paper trays Specification Value Paper trays 2 x 1100 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond A4 B5 LTR 2x 550 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond AsR 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 320 x 450 mm SRA3 13 x 19 330 x 483 mm Custom size 139 7 x 182 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 5 5 X 7 17 to 13 x 19 20 Chapter 12 Specifications 379 Specifications Specification Value Paper level indication visual Automatic tray opening Paper module Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Specification Value Description Optional 3 tray paper input module Paper trays 3 x 2000 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond Maximum paper capac 6000 sheets Paper sizes 13 x19 330 x 483 mm 12 x 18 305 x 457 mm 11 X 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm 12 5 8 x 17
82. system What is the media catalog The media catalogue is a list of predefined media and media attributes which you can define in the Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller When you use the media catalog the operator panel the printer drivers and other appli cations all display the same list of predefined media The operator panel and the printer driver automatically retrieve and display the latest version of the media catalog What are temporary media You can also use many other media that are not included in the Media catalog These media become temporary media You can look up the currently used temporary media in the Media section of the System view Furthermore you can assign the temporary media to a paper tray The temporary media remain available on the system until No more waiting jobs need this media type No more scheduled jobs need this media type No more printed jobs need this media type m This media type is no longer available in the paper trays 146 Chapter 6 Print jobs Introduction to the media handling When you plan to use these media more often you can add these temporary media to the Media catalog Chapter 6 Print jobs 147 Add temporary media to the Media catalog Add temporary media to the Media catalog Introduction When a job is submitted that requires media that are not included in the Media catalog these media become temporary med
83. the Hardware itself to them provided you retain no copies and transfer all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades or anything related to the Software including but not limited to its instruction manual The recipient must use the Software under the terms and conditions outlined in this Terms and Conditions section m You may not remove or alter any trademarks trade names product names logos copyrights or other proprietary notices legends symbols or labels of Canon or its li censors in the Software Canon or its licensors retain all rights titles and interests including all copyrights and intellectual property rights in and to the Software and all copies thereof You may not export or re export directly or indirectly the Software in violation of any related laws restrictions and regulations or without all necessary approvals m Canon or its licensors in the Software Canon s subsidiaries and affiliates and Canon s distributors and dealers are not responsible for maintaining or assisting you in your use of the Software and are not responsible for updates bug fixes or support for the Software If an upgrade version of the Software is provided to you it is provided to you in exchange for the previous version In this case such an upgrade version is re garded as the Software and used under the terms and conditions outlined in this Terms and Conditions section You can no longe
84. the copy job The jobs are immediately sent to the list of Scheduled jobs The machine will print the jobs in the ripped order You can do the following to rearrange the order in which the jobs will be printed Move jobs to the list of Waiting jobs or m Use To top to move a job to the top of the list of Scheduled jobs Waiting jobs On You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be printed The machine always stops before the next sched uled job You must press the Release key gt to start each job Off On conflict The machine prints the scheduled jobs one after the other The machine does not stop before the next scheduled job unless there is a reason to stop For example when a media is not available Ask for a confirmation if a conflict occurs For example when the punch setting is set in the driver and the printer has no puncher 322 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Work with the workflow profiles Setting Values Effect Check first 1 set Offset stack ing The machine goes on hold after the first set of a job is printed You can check the quality and lay out of the first set before the machine prints the remaining sets The machine will print the whole job without stopping after the first set As in job Sets always The machine will print the jobs as indicated in the job ticket
85. the header on top side and in portrait position vertical Header up SEF Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in landscape position horizontal Header down LEF Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in portrait position vertical a Header down SEF Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in landscape position horizontal Advanced m Front back settings gt Default value The front page on the front the Print order back page on the back m Back front Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front Advanced o degrees settings gt m 180 degrees Rotation Rotates the prints 180 degrees 186 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Output settings Margin erase Setting Values Binding edge Output settings Adjust image Setting Values Adjust im Describe age original Describe copy Contrast Description Margins of a document sometimes contain notes or punch holes for example The machine allows you to hide these elements on the copy With the and buttons of the Binding edge setting you can define how much margin of the original you want to erase You can enter a value up to 100 mm 3 94 inches Description The Adjust Image setting allows you to define the copy and scan quality manually Depending on the s
86. the list of Scheduled jobs and Waiting jobs m The Printed jobs section The Printed jobs section enables you to manage print jobs in the list of Printed jobs m The Copy Scan section The Copy Scan section enables you to manage copy and scan jobs using copy tem plates and scan profiles The Jobs view Job 1 S 4 6 rR 7 ae To top Stop after job Hold Ticket Select Interrupt Scheduled jobs 3 jobs 1 selected Job je Sets Duration Used media EFI Job 1 May 2 2011 Normal A4 i Mr Jones gn q 7 37 28 AM O28 Ly as D 80 gint White Job 2 May 2 2011 Normal A4 Mr Jones cri fl 7 37 45 AM 23 F a4 D 80 gm Red atten May 2 2014 Normal A4 Ms Jones Su i 7 37 59 AM isu Ly 44D 80 ain White Waiting jobs 1 job 0 selected Job Pages Sets Submitted Duration Used media fy Job 4 oo May 2 2011 gt Ms Jone soo 7 38 15 AM nel A 9O Schedule seneaue o Jobs Trays h System The job icons may show one or more of the following status icons Chapter 4 Operator panel views 87 The Jobs view Icon Description The printer is downloading the document via the network spooling The printer converts the document into a printable bitmap ripping The printer is printing The job is ready for printing The printer converts and prints simultaneously ripping and printing The job contains an operator note Indicates a s
87. toolbar select the required option to maintain the output profiles Chapter 3 Operating concept 73 Maintain the Spot colors Maintain the Spot colors Introduction Spot colors are used to standardize colors to make sure that colors match regardless of the equipment used to produce the color Maintain the Spot colors 1 From the navigation bar select the color tab 2 From the color tab select Spot colors The Spot colors window appears iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Log out Help Preferences Workflow Configuration Support Output profiles Spot colours A m 2 x Add Copy Edit Delete teray KS N Name Filter All colours Colour Custom colours HKS K HKS K 3000 HKS N 3000 PANTONE Goe coated PANTONE Goe uncoated PANTONE solid coated PANTONE solid uncoated 144 The Spot colors window 3 From the toolbar select the required option to maintain the spot colors 74 Chapter 3 Operating concept Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare Introduction Oc PRISMAprepare allows you to prepare the print job completely on page level You can preview the result per page PRISMAprepare is an optional application This procedure describes the most important settings for daily use Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare 1 Prepare the document PRISMAprepare Fle ER vew Select Pages Document Toos Help F
88. tray IMPORTANT m Do not print on the back of the envelopes the side with the flap m Ifthe envelopes become filled with air flatten them by hand before loading them into the special feeder m Load the envelopes as shown below If you are using Nagagata 3 or Kakugata 2 lt Feeding Direction If you are using ISO B5 lt Feeding Direction If you are using COM10 No 10 Monarch DL ISO C5 or Yougatanaga 3 lt Feeding Direction Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 283 Load the media into the special feeder multipurpose tray O IMPORTANT m The special feeder can hold five envelopes at a time m Ifthe envelopes do not pass through the printer properly after following the pro cedures up to this point repeat the procedures by feeding once for each envelope m Envelopes may be creased in the printing process 284 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Loading transparencies Loading transparencies Introduction You can load transparencies into the following paper source Paper drawers of the main unit Special feeder POD Deck Lite A1 Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Unlike normal paper transparencies have a specific
89. venient to print a job ticket before printing a job to get an overview of the main job characteristics Job tickets can contain the following information for example Job name a Job owner m Job destination m Job settings such as the number of sets m Required media The Ticket button which allows you to print a job ticket is available in various locations on the operator panel NOTE You can only print a job ticket for 1 job at a time Locations of the Ticket button The Ticket button is available at the following locations m List of Printed jobs if this function is enabled in the Settings Editor m List of Scheduled jobs m List of Waiting jobs Print the job ticket 124 1 Go to one of the following locations m Touch Jobs gt Queues If collapsed first touch to expand the desired list of Scheduled jobs or Waiting jobs m Touch Jobs gt Printed jobs 2 Touch the job for which you want to print the job ticket 3 Press Ticket The job is sent to the bottom of the list of Scheduled jobs The job may not be immedi ately visible in the list of Scheduled jobs You can recognize the job by the prefix _ in front of the job name Chapter 6 Print jobs Make a proof Make a proof Introduction You can make a proof to check whether the quality and the layout of the output meet your expectations When you use the Proof function the machine prints 1 copy o
90. view The System view Introduction 90 The system view enables you to access all functions to maintain and set up the system From the left side of the System view you can access the following sections The Printer section The Printer section enables you to check the toner levels and the status of the waste boxes and staples of finishing equipment The Maintenance section The Maintenance section enables you to read the counters and start the maintenance actions The Setup section The Setup section enables you to set up your personal workflow the behavior of the operator panel and the advanced system settings The Media section The Media section enables you to view the content of the Media catalog or add temporary media to the Media catalog The Color management section The Color management section gives access to the following functions Chapter 4 Operator panel views The System view The System view Printing myJob Stacker stapler item Status Toner Black Upper tray stapler 1 0 staples used since last refill Upper tray stapler 2 0 staples used since last refill Lower tray stapler 1 0 staples used since last refill Toner Cyan Lower tray stapler 2 0 staples used since last refill Open the cyan toner cover Booklet tray stapler 1 0 staples used since last refill Toner Magenta Booklet tray stapler 2 0 staples used s
91. waste toner container eN O Schedule Jobs Trays Bs System 499 The location of the toner icons left side of the main window Check the status of the toner reservoirs and waste toner container 1 On the operator panel touch the button for the System view 2 Press Printer The Toner section displays the toner and waste toner icons The color of the toner icon indicates the current filling level of the toner reservoir mThe dashboard on page 84 300 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Replace the toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge Introduction The system informs you on the dashboard of the operator panel when new toner is re quired A WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames as this may cause toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite resulting in burns or a fire A CAUTION Keep toner out of the reach of small children If toner is ingested consult a physician immediately a Take care not to allow toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing If toner gets onto your hands or clothing wash it off immediately with cold water Washing it off with warm water will set the toner and make it impos sible to remove toner stains O IMPORTANT m Use only toner cartridges intended for use with this machine Do not replace toner cartridges until the message asking you to do so appears m You can replace a toner cart
92. white Black and white Select this setting to make black amp white scans e Grayscale Select this setting to make grayscale scans When you select this option the Image type and Zoom func tions are disabled The file type automatically changes into the preferred settings Color Select this setting to make color scans NOTE To make color scans the color scanning option must be licensed sRGB Select sRGB for a smaller color gamut with smaller differences between consecutive colors The sRGB setting reduces the risk of banding AdobeRGB Select AdobeRGB for a bigger color gamut with bigger differences between consecutive colors The AdobeRGB setting increases the risk of banding wScan to file on page 227 226 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Scan to file Scan to file How to use the scan to file function 1 Place the originals face up into the ADF or place 1 original face down on the glass plate 2 Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan 3 Select a scan to file profile The job window opens 4 Change the settings for the original and the file 5 Touch Start The scanner scans the originals The system sends the resulting file to the scan server The file is stored with a predefined name in a designated directory There is no message on the operator panel to inform you that the file was stored successfully You can access the status information on th
93. 03 LOOT A E EEA EEA E E A E 204 Copy quality Copy quality srete RER 212 Copy tray Copy AY resse asaini iii E 32 Copy Tray P1 Copy Tray Pi cscsesssessccsssesciassossesertenvescussarasesase 32 Corona wire Corona Wire esesesssseseseesesesesseseseseesesesossesesees 352 Counters COUNTERS E OERE 357 358 Cover plate Cleanings ao i rE E E 347 Covers COVERS roet A E I AN 162 Copy job 448 Print JOD isisisi iisas 107 Create a hotfolder Cr ate a hotfolder si ssi isssiscseisecietseiceustiaceeess 339 Creating a Custom Template Creating a Custom Template oo 207 Custom templates Grates e E Micasdseoas caveseevstavensivenecncs 207 Delete iiras teas esra ETA 207 Makerdefault pucnccriiiotinRan 207 Rename escssss2ssbiseiscehtsislacas estate Hi lesdcdes 207 DAVE EERE AE E E EE R 207 E E E E ET 207 D Dashboard Dashboard sssscscsisiessisseisesetiaiveese iessicsseaes az ccazed 84 Date and time Date and time cccccecccceseseeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeees 328 Day counters Day COUNEETS 52 ia casts tease AES 357 Default gateway Default gateway icenean 328 Define job settings in hotfolder Define job settings in hotfolder 0 0 0 342 Delete Automated workflow cceeeseseeeeeeeteeeeeeees 335 Delete a custom template Delete a custom template wees 207 Delete jobs Al ODS eiser EIRE 128 Jobs with available media ceceeseeeeeeeees 128 Jobs with label oo cceseeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeees List of Printed
94. 1 Shading correction Introduction The 1 Shading correction procedure corrects slight density unevenness that occurs on the printed image in the areas with a color density of 50 The 1 Shading correction assures consistent color planes on the print NOTE Make sure you use media from the same batch for 1 Shading correction and 2 Auto gradation adjustment When to do m After a service visit m After replacing the drum key operator maintenance m After replacing the corona key operator maintenance Before you begin Make sure you have an Eye One spectrophotometer connected to the USB connector of the operator panel Make sure you use one of the following media m Canon CS 814 81 4 g m Oc Top Colour FSC 100 g m m Mondi Neusiedler 100 g m m International Paper Hammermill 105 g m Calibrate the printer 1 Shading correction 1 Touch System gt Color management 2 Touch 1 Shading correction and touch Start An instruction window opens 3 Follow the instructions carefully and touch Next A calibration chart is printed An instruction window opens 4 Calibrate the spectrometer according to the instruction on the operator panel 362 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Calibrate the printer 1 Shading correction m Place the spectrometer in the holder press the button to calibrate the spectrometer and wait for 5 seconds m Take 5 blank sheets o
95. 22 lb bond pacity 382 Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Specification Value Maximum stacking ca 4250 sheets pacity in sheets A4 1500 2500 250 LTR A4R 750 750 125 LTRR AsR 1500 1500 250 STMTR A3 750 750 125 1 1 x 17 SRA3 750 750 30 1 3 n x 1 9 Paper weight 52 300 g m 14 lb bond 110 lb cover Paper size Corner stapling front rear 30 degrees A4R A3 B4 A4 Bs LGL LTRR LTR EXEC 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm Two point stapling A3 B4 A4 A4R Bs 11 x 17 279 4 X 431 8 mm LTR LTRR LGL EXEC Dimensions unit Wx 782 x 765 x 1040 mm DxH 30 79 X 30 12 x 40 94 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 8 A Corner stapling Two point stapling also A4R LTRR Stacker stapler Booklet Finisher A1 E Value Maximum sad dle stitch ca Stacker stapler with same stacking and stapling capabilities as staple finisher plus saddle stitching functionality 20 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond pacity Chapter 12 Specifications 383 Specifications Specification Value Output capaci ty Paper weight Paper size Dimensions unit W x Dx On Conveyor belt 25 booklets 80 g m 20 lb bond Booklet pages 64 220 g m 17 lb bond 81 lb cover Booklet cover up to 300 g m 110 lb cover For booklets before folding B4 A4R A3 SRA3 13 x 19 330 x 483 mm 12 x 18 305 x 457 mm 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm LGL LTRR Custom sizes 210 X 279 3
96. 5 tescssicsssivsiensussasedesesdsassiesisnacis 328 Maintenance view Maintenance view scsccssessessessessesscsseeseenees 344 450 Make a custom template your default Make a custom template your default 207 Make a proof Make a proos scsesentsaseeiescnsiessseesestuensdontiesyad 125 Manual settings Pint JOD a n ies casararsioaaatisieectetges 104 Margin erase Copy JOD eesdisissdeditidssiesdeiteidabechiatedrsesscssasveses 187 Sean JOD svsastndiiivddsrdasasins wade detec 224 Margin Shift Margin Shifts ast sciesiieaeiiesdescneaeuisocuins 164 Media Bulk paper module wo eee 257 GO Py JOD rrie E E 179 TOUS i csisess sdssas sdseseacss saseses icsavedesevedsvesssonesecess 140 Tnnforiniation ss acssisisacseccecsnossvivevensctesuncvesscoees 140 Inserter Integrated paper tray wo ceeceeeseseeeeeeeeeeees 237 Paper module siiiiiiascrdcassisiteanaietisiiees 245 PHAN jobro e a OERE 106 Schedule View ssisssedisscescssstiesiseiasessissesetssesecens 137 Special feeder Trays view Media catalog Media Catalog icssiccicsiserssassbecesssateetscssnsie CONCEP a aese ni EE rE ESE Printer driv t sisisi PRISMAprepare optional Media family Mediafamily somrar EERE 68 Media handling DOS Chiptl Onn apeere A RS 146 Media registration Media registration sesessessesseeresreeseeseesresesee 149 Media size SCAN JOD dassesssssdsccescssies co deisessesdstzesssesstesdsstens 222 Meter readings Mete
97. 5 x 457 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 SSSA SSSI SSSA SSSA 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 SSSR SAE 44 Chapter 2 Main parts Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Paper size Output tray Middle Lower Booklet tray G xo xo i D lt 4 i Envelope Custom 100 0 x 148 0 mm size to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 4 x 5 7 8 to 13 x 19 1 4 SISINISINISISINISINISE Soos SIS 1 Custom paper sizes can only be output if they are 210 0 x 279 3 mm to 297 0 x 487 7 mm 8 1 4 x 11 to 11 3 4 x 19 1 4 or 297 1 x 279 3 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 11 3 4 x 11 to 13 x 19 1 4 Chapter 2 Main parts 45 Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit NOTE The booklet tray can only be used when Booklet Finisher A1 is attached Optional accessories Staple G1 113 A case for stapling The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is m 100 in case of Staple G1 Staple P1 114 A case for saddle stitching mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 46 Chapter 2 Main parts The puncher The puncher Introduction Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 reverses the paper punched by Professional Puncher C1 to prevent paper jams The puncher is optional O IMPORTANT Always keep the main power switch of Professional Puncher C1 on the front cover woe set to I
98. 60 Copy job Print job Black and white SCAB OD AEE EREE 226 Booklet Finisher A1 Booklet Finisher A1 cccccsccssessessesseseeseeseeeeees 33 Booklet maker Booklet maker cccccccccscesscesscesssesseesessseesseeees 33 Bulk paper module Bulk paper module Load media c cccsesessessessessessesscssesscsseeeeenees Bundle print jobs Bundle print jobs c cc cseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 157 Bundled jobs Change job settings cccccseseseseseeeeseeees 157 Cc Calibration 1 Shading correction ccceeeseseseeessseseeeeees 2 Auto gradation adjustment ie 3 Media family calibration oo cesses Tntroduction scicisessseisessisssssssosassssssosasssstavtaess 361 Calibration curve Calibration GULVE ssissiisesssiissassini essi riisiinisess 368 cartridge Finishing method mage shift sasciccssecesssessscsdsebvonssssnss sovensessesvases Margin Shift Media sereis Number of sets sis DISSE stac kinei ee o saaues Output locatiONssisinss sises rsisi Print Odense cssiiet cssssssssiserissteessstbssdevesecieasss ROCA OD ise maa a E TAE R Separator sheets Settings for covers Sheet order Sheet orientation Sort by page sisccsccisssssusbenssivsivesnateccsscdecavessanes Sort by set Warning time Change paper size Integrated paper tray cceseseseseseeteeeees 243 Paper module s scsscscisasssssssosendescvcsboaseses ssseeses 252 change paper size multidrawer paper deck A1 POD deck lit
99. 61 1185 XB Amstelveen The Netherlands See http www canon europe com for details on your regional dealer CANON LATIN AMERICA INC 703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami Florida 33126 U S A CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney N S W 2113 Australia CANON CHINA CO LTD 15F Jinbao Building No 89 Jinbao Street Dongcheng District Beijing 100005 China CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 1 HarbourFront Avenue 04 01 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 CANON HONGKONG CO LTD 19 F The Metropolis Tower 10 Metropolis Drive Hunghom Kowloon Hong Kong USRM2 0698 01 CANON INC 2011
100. 7 mm A3 A4 A4R A5R and custom size 139 7 x 182 0 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 13 x19 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 12 x 18 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR EXEC and custom size 5 4 x 7 1 8 to 13 x 19 1 4 Load the media into the integrated paper tray 238 1 Press and release the button on the paper drawer in which you want to load paper Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the integrated paper trays 2 Grip the handle then pull out the paper drawer until it stops 3 Open a package of paper and remove the paper stack A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper O IMPORTANT m Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight m Ifyou print onto paper that has absorbed moisture steam may be released from the printer output area This is because the moisture on the paper evaporates when high temperatures are applied to fix toner to the paper This is not a malfunction This can especially happen at low room temperatures Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 239 Load the media into the integrated paper trays NOTE m For high quality printouts use paper recommended by your authorized dealer Before loading paper always fan the sheets several times and align the edges to facilitate feeding i Ih 4 Load the paper
101. 74 Stacker stapler Stacker stapler Trin Waste ciate naene a EN Staple Cartridge Saddle stitch Umit ccssssssessssssssossensnseseees 312 Stapler wit isi sesssssevestossesicestesscvssessonsuves sssttess 308 Staple Finisher A1 Staple Finisher At s s cerserssescecisocotssssecstecstereree 33 Staple icons Staple icons eanna EER 306 Staple the output Staple the output wee naoi 211 Staple G1 Staple GI orriei 33 Stapler eT E EE E 33 453 Index Staples Copy job Print job Stop behavior Stop alter a JOD sicsssess scsssssasscesdsetessiesessoedaveiess 126 StOp after a Set s cscassesvesevevssssisedescvssessiens dovees 126 Stop the printer After a JOD csssovasssisessussscevenaseasseadeseoiesessensdeaces 126 Afera pape reran EAT 126 After aset seresa a ASER NE 126 Ato miatically sisac sedeecstensi lestteetaietesdenscesiie 126 Maint y oregonian E 126 Subnet mask Subnetmask sienna nns 328 Subsets Add seisidiiesdscsieisiaseeevneieissienciietencts 230 Create 1 document csccsecsscseeseeseeseesseeeeeeees 202 Create one fe sisus cxvvasvestesvasssnissectcascssats 229 Decl te E E A 231 Editvaisitiddcsdisiininnana i plawsadiiasts 231 iisert ais iesisstsssccesieacssisvanstecvesttardesastbiastssonesees 231 Tabb Sheets isi ccscdisseisssscssisdesscssasscssesecbissttevesess 202 System administrator settings System administrator settings wee 328 System of measurement System of measurement es
102. 9 The scan profiles at the lower row The factory default profiles Overview of the scan profiles Template When to use Scan to USB Scan to the USB stick TIFF printing Scan for printing purposes TIFF viewing archiving Scan for viewing and archiving purposes 214 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Introduction to the scan function Template When to use PDF printing Scan for printing purposes PDF viewing archiving Scan for viewing and archiving purposes Chapter 8 Scan jobs 215 Description of the scan job settings Description of the scan job settings Introduction To scan a document you must first select a scan profile A scan profile contains default job settings After you select a scan profile the job window opens The job window allows you to change a number of default settings for the original and the resulting file To in crease the productivity the system automatically links the Size settings for the Origi nal and the File However you can always manually overrule this automated setting The automated setting has the prefix Auto The changes that you make only apply to the current job This section describes the parts and settings of the job window 216 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Description of the scan job settings Illustration File Type ohtion R a Fie name Scanjob_20110502_123916 titt TIFF Muti Page LIW 600 dpi Zoom a Fr to page 100 Auto To
103. A4 D 60 gmr Bue Required output locations 1 El _stackeristapler upper tray i Schedule 9 Jobs Trays 8 system 218 The Schedule view 1 The jobs pane The jobs pane shows the jobs on a timeline The width of the job corresponds to the remaining print time A vertical line separates the jobs The vertical line moves to the left as the printing of a job progresses An icon and the job name represent a job The icon indicates the state of the job for ex ample printing amp Furthermore the i icon indicates the stop moments of the machine For example when the setting Confirm start of job in the workflow profiles see list of references below is set to On or when you use the Stop after job function 2 The Required media pane The Required media pane displays the media that are required for each scheduled job For each required media the media properties are displayed see list of references below The bars show the availability of the media The bars can have the following colors 134 Chapter 6 Print jobs Introduction to the Schedule view The colors of the bars Color of the bar Description Green The required media is available Orange The media is required in the future but not available then For example because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the required media Yellow The system cannot determine th
104. Canon ImageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO C9065S PRO Operating Information Please read this guide before operating this product ENG Contents Contents Chapter 1 Preface siisicissieceticttciectetecccdiaiedideiceneitbescececitheeiand tities aie 7 Trademarks sess scecdis cs rinira aaa aa aaa ae iaaa a aiidis 8 Copyright sssssssssssessessssssinssrsesinnnnnennnnnnsnetnnn case eee eaaaaeaeeeeeseaaaeeseeeeseeeeeeeeens 10 NOteS TOP the Tea sisinarieun aaia 11 Abbreviations used in this Manual c ccssssssssseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseesessees 13 Available COCUMENtATION cccccccccecececeeseeessenseseeeeceseeaueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 14 Chapter 2 M in AEE iiss es Saad sxcedic sense ERa naaa ara aA R NEERA 15 Overview of the machine configuration s ssssssessssssssrsssssrnrsnnssrnnnnnsene 16 The paper Modul scc2ecctivice tian annenin naain i aaaeei 19 Bulk paper MOCUICS oe seecicivsescediveeteesdases tsnena iinne 21 The automatic document feeder ADF c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 23 The Operator Panels sisisissecccceticcsevsccacdedeoeiaan hesvdtavsss iana aaa aaa 26 The operator attention liQht cccceceeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 TAG COPY tray oscine aaa a a EAER aN 32 Stacker stapler and integrated punch UNit ccccesseeessessessnnseseeeneeees 33 The PUNCHEL ccccecceessseeesenesesseaneeeeaeeesenceeeeeeesesessesseessecsecenesaneeeeaneeeeeeees 47 MV
105. Check first set setting there when a workflow profile is selected where the Check first set setting is As in job How to enable the checking of the first set 152 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job of which you want to check the first set NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job amp 3 Touch Properties or touch the job 2x to open the Properties window 4 Touch the Number of sets button 5 Touch Check first set when the button states Off Chapter 6 Print jobs Check the first set The text changes from Off to On A check mark indicates that the checking of the first set is enabled 6 Press OK The Number of sets button will now show a check mark 7 Press OK m Work with the workflow profiles on page 320 Chapter 6 Print jobs 153 Change the use of separator sheets Change the use of separator sheets Introduction Separator sheets are empty sheets that are automatically inserted before each new set or job to separate two sets or jobs In the Settings Editor you can define the media that must be used as separator sheets The use of separator sheets can be enabled via the automated workflows in the Settings Editor However you can change this setting trough the oper ator panel How to change the use of separator sheets 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job of which you want to change the settings
106. D IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDEN TAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 4 Sun Microsystems Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara California 95054 U S A All rights reserved Use is subject to license terms below This distribution may include materials developed by third parties Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and other countries Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Sun Microsyste
107. Extra heavy Uncoated Heavy Description Factory default In use Description Uncoated Normal HT_Normal v1 0 ie Fine Uncoated Normal HT_Fine ED v1 0 z Error diffusion Uncoated Normal HT_Fine ED v1 0 g Cancel 139 The Add media family window Chapter 3 Operating concept 69 Maintain the Color pre sets Maintain the Color pre sets Introduction A color pre set is a collection of color and quality settings that matches a specific document type workflow or color application The color pre sets enable users to select the correct settings easily without in depth knowledge about color management The controller provides the following color pre sets to start printing immediately a Office documents to print Microsoft Office documents Microsoft Office documents use the RGB color space m Photographic content to print documents from photo editing or layout applications These documents use the CMYK color space A color expert can create more color pre sets The color pre sets appear in the printer driver and in PRISMAprepare optional software Maintain the Color pre sets 70 1 From the navigation bar select the color tab 2 From the color tab select Color pre sets The Color pre sets window appears iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Log out Help Media Preferences Workflow Configuration Support Colour default
108. GES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEV ER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CON TRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 3 Cambridge Broadband Ltd copyright notice BSD Portions of this code are copyright c 2001 2003 Cambridge Broadband Ltd All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Chapter 13 Third party software 411 The BSD License 412 The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd may not be used to endorse or promote roducts derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS ORIMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIME
109. INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright c 1990 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any docu mentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IM 416 Chapter 13 Third party software MSTLIB PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTIC ULAR PURPOSE Chapter 13 Third party software 417 Java Servlet Implementation Classes Version 2 1 1 Binary Code License Java Serviet Implementation Classes Version 2 1 1 Binary Code License 418 1 Java Platform Interface Licensee may not modify the Java Platform Interface JPI identified as classes contained within the javax package or any subpackages of the javax package by creating additional classes within the JPI or otherwise causing the addition to or modification of the classes in t
110. LTR EXEC paper the copies or prints are offset but not stapled In addition when selecting coated or heavy paper you may not be able to use Staple mode even if the number of sheets including sheet insertions or job separa tors is below the set limit of the finisher Saddle stitching Saddle stitching allows you to make booklets whose pages are folded and stapled in the center Chapter 2 Main parts 39 Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit 40 Originals Copy The pages are folded and stapled in the centre to form a booklet O IMPORTANT m Saddle stitching is available only if Booklet Finisher A1 is attached m The maximum number of sheets that can be saddle stitched differs depending on the paper weight and type Including one cover sheet up to 300 g m 110 lb cover Paper other than coated paper 20 sheets 60 to 81 4 g m 16 21 lb bond 10 sheets 81 5 to 105 g m 22 28 lb bond Coated paper 5 sheets 106 to 209 g m 29 lb bond to 110 lb index NOTE m You cannot saddle stitch tracing paper transparencies prepunched paper tab paper 1 tab paper 2 labels or envelopes m The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm A3 B4 A4R custom size 210 0 x 279 3 mm to 297 0 x 487 7 mm or custom size 297 1 x 279 3 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 13 x 19 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 12 x 18 11 x 17 LGL LTRR custom
111. License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complet
112. MPORTANT You will not be able to make copies or print if you load paper that exceeds the loading limit or the paper tray is not completely pushed into the printer Always check that the paper drawers are in place and that the paper does not exceed the loading limit NOTE If paper runs out during copying or printing load a new paper stack and follow the instructions on the touch panel display The machine automatically restarts and produces the remaining copies or prints Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Adjust the integrated paper tray to hold a different paper size Adjust the integrated paper tray to hold a different paper size Introduction If you want to load a different paper size into a paper drawer follow the procedure de scribed below to adjust the paper drawer guides O IMPORTANT Only A4 LTR transparencies can be used Make sure that the left guide is set to A4 LTR when loading transparencies into a paper drawer If transparencies of a dif ferent size other than A4 LTR are loaded into a paper drawer the paper size and remaining amount of paper is not correctly detected Adjusting the paper tray to hold a different paper size 1 Press and release the button on the paper drawer that you want to adjust Grip the handle then pull out the paper drawer until it stops Remove all of the remaining paper Left Guide ce D Slide the guid ntil it clicks into pla
113. N ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Chapter 13 Third party software 415 MSTLIB MSTLIB Copyright c 1994 1997 2001 2002 Red Hat Incorporated All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Red Hat Incorporated may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL RED HAT INCORPORATED BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PRO CUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT
114. NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job amp after you stopped the printer press the Stop button two times 3 Press Properties 4 Touch the Separator sheets button to toggle between On and Off 5 Press OK mIntroduction to automated workflows on page 331 154 Chapter 6 Print jobs Stack the prints with an offset Stack the prints with an offset Introduction The Offset stacking function creates a visible distinction between sets or jobs in an output location The active workflow profile or the active automated workflow determines the default type of offset stacking The table below describes the possible types of offset stacking Furthermore the table describes when you can change the defined type of offset stacking in the Properties window Types of offset stacking Default type of offset Possible changes in the Properties window stacking Jobs No changes possible Sets always You can indicate the number of sets N sets after which an offset will be applied for example 5 Then 5 sets will be delivered in a straight stack The next 5 sets will also be delivered in a straight stack but with a shift compared to the previous stack N must be a value between 1 and 65536 default 1 NOTE When Sets always is possible the Properties window displays a special button at the upper right hand side which is otherwise not visible
115. PRO Production printing Finishing Chapter 3 Operating concept 63 Access the Settings Editor Access the Settings Editor Introduction The Settings Editor is a web based application and therefore accessible via an Internet browser The Settings Editor enables you to manage settings or to display information in the following areas Media color Preferences Workflow Configuration Support Before you begin Make sure you have the following information The IP address or hostname of the controller The key operator password to change all settings except for the settings in the Config uration tab The administrator password to change all settings including the settings in the Con figuration tab Access the Settings Editor 1 Open the Internet browser 2 At the address bar enter the IP address or hostname of the controller The Settings Editor appears iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Colour Preferences Workflow Configuration Support xXxavh amp BB B Add Edit Delete Up Down Import Export Restore Printer adjustment ajnana mnn jaan Media Printer adjustment A4 100g m2 TopColor White A4 135g m2 TopColor White A3 100g m2 TopColor White 43 135g m2 TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 105g m2 TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 135g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 105g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 135g m2 TopC
116. Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain respon sibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the rec
117. RVIEW ss ideidssdesdecdecdeidesseisasiedi acs acs seasceddesseice 86 Required media pane Streaming jobs ZOOM CONTEO cecesseeseeseeseeseseeseseseseeseeeeeees 136 Schedule waiting jobs Schedule waiting jobs wc eeeeseeeeeeees 130 Select Different media for job sssssssssssssssssissessrssee 161 Separator sheets Separator sheets sicscississeovstnsivsnscsscsscsnseveseanes 154 Copy JOD wsesssesssesedeccsssstesssestonsssisestessuses saess3s 193 Pintjob inaa aen T INA 117 Serial number Serial pumber ssseisasscssteadessssdesdeasdessessasscsisescss 328 Settings Editor Access Access through operator panel Chanigey settings aR aN coansnszsodaniee 328 COREE E ET E E 60 View SELUDBS sakosi n iE 328 Shading correction Shading COrrecti n sc scsscssescseasessoessosorenseees 362 Shift Gopy JOD seiniau 183 Prntjo berna R AE 109 Shut down procedure Shut down procedure wcrc 98 Size Original setting espns iris 176 SCAM JOD nna tora n NENE 220 Sleep button Sleep Duttotiecisdssiissmrisnnidadcdiecasnncien 94 Sleep mode Automatically sessioissa Manually oes Use the Sleep button Wake Upesi paniis Software licenses Software LiGeMses ss sccassensscesesecssasesssesestoniuscess 328 Special feeder Load media sasori 278 Specifications Specifications reman aee 370 Split print jobs Split print Jobs s sissies cctascideacasvensceavsnn dss 157 Spot color Spot Colotes cates uy seas E EERS
118. S OU LEI TA E A E A T E 49 POMS E A E E A E E A ET 52 Chapter 3 Operating CONGep ties cscs cieciieiideki esti ctveeeeed heise chen aadi iaai 59 Operating CONCENL ccccccecceeseecesseeeeesneeaneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseesseeeeseenaneeeeed 60 Access the Settings Eqitor eecceccceceesescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 64 Maintain the Media Catalog c ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeeessaeaees 66 Maintain the Media famili s cccccccccccccceeeceeesssessssessssnnanseeeaeeeeeeeees 68 Maintain the Color Pre Sets ccccccccccccccecceceeecceesseceseeeseseesaeeeeeaneeeeeeees 70 Maintain the Input profiles ecccceeeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaees 72 Maintain the Output profiles 2 2 00 cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 73 Maintain the Spot colors ccceeceecsceceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeaeaaeeeeeeesseaaees 74 Prepare print jobs with PRISMA prepa e ssssssssssnseeeceeeeeeeeeees 75 Prepare print jobs with the printer Criver c ssscsssssccscceeeeeeeeeeeeees 77 Manage production printing ccccccceeeeecesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeesaaees 80 Chapter 4 Operator panel VieWS ciiiis ciceeccccidecceedcciediiiesieeeeteeetbiesciesiees teins addi eeeesaaviioe 83 The AaShbOAald cccssssesssessesnneesneeeeceeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseessseessesesceeeeauseeeseeeseees 84 The Schedule ViGW c cccccsscc
119. Sets as in job You can set the Offset stacking function to m On each set will be shifted compared to the previous set or m Off all sets are delivered in 1 straight stack No changes possible No changes possible How to change the type of offset stacking in the Properties window 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job of which you want to change the type of offset stacking You can only change the settings of the active print job amp after you have stopped the printer press the Stop button two times 3 Touch Properties or touch the job two times to open the Properties window Chapter 6 Print jobs 155 Stack the prints with an offset 4 Touch the Print delivery button when the default type of offset stacking is Sets as in You can only change this setting when the default type of offset stacking is set to Sets as in job 5 Make the required changes 6 Press OK m Work with the workflow profiles on page 320 mIntroduction to automated workflows on page 331 156 Chapter 6 Print jobs Combine jobs Combine jobs Introduction The bundle function allows you to combine 2 or more jobs into 1 new job For example this can be convenient when the participants of a meeting need several documents in a specific order Often the required documents are sent from several workplaces to the printer in advance Normally this means that you must print
120. The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself ifand wherever such third party acknowledgements normally appear 4 The names The Jakarta Project Commons Xerces Crimson Velocity and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org wow 5 Products derived from this software may not be called Jakarta Commons Xerces Crimson Velocity or Apache nor may Jakarta Commons Xerces Crimson Velocity or Apache appear in their names without prior written permission of the Apache Group Chapter 13 Third party software Bouncy Castle License Bouncy Castle License COPYRIGHT INFORMATION Copyright c 2000 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle http www bouncycastle org Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without re striction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to who
121. Touch the new custom template to select this template When you touch the new template for 2 seconds a menu appears that allows you to select delete or rename the template or make it your new default template Chapter 7 Copy jobs 207 Rename a copy job Rename a copy job Introduction When you carry out a new copy job the system creates an automatic name for the job The default name Copy Job followed by a sequence number is displayed in the Job name field However you can rename the copy job into a name of your choice This name helps you to recognize the job in the list of Scheduled jobs or Waiting jobs How to rename a copy job 1 In the job window touch Job name A keyboard appears 2 Touch Backspace until the current name is deleted 3 Touch the characters to enter a new name 4 Press OK 208 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Copy non standard size originals Copy non standard size originals Introduction You can use the automatic document feeder to copy originals in a simple and quick way The automatic document feeder supports the following standard media sizes mw As A5R A4 A4R A3 B5 B5R and B4 a LGL LTR STML 13 x 19 2 330 2 x 487 7 mm 12 x 18 305 x 457 mm and 11 x 17 279 x 432 mm The document feeder supports non standard sizes from 139 7 x 182 mm to 630 x 297 mm 5 5 x 7 17 to 24 80 x 11 30 If more than one media fits the user must select the desired m
122. USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redis tribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the program s name and an idea of what it does Copyright C yyyy name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have
123. Value Device memory 2 5 GB SDRAM SDRAM Operation One integrated 15 full color touch screen operating panel for total system no engine controller separation Hard disk 80 GB option can be replaced by 1 TB HDD Second hard disk optional Warm up time imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO 6 minutes imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9065S PRO 5 minutes Front to back registra Leading edge 1 5 mm o 059 tion tolerance Left and right 2 0 mm o 079 374 Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Specification Value Dimensions main en 1120 x 932 x 1400 mm 44 x 36 7 x 55 12 gine WxDxH with automatic document feeder operator panel H incl operator attention light 1650 mm 94 96 W operating panel in most right position 1275 mm 50 2 Weight main engine 304 kg 670 lbs with toner automatic document feeder operator panel and PRISMAsync controller Operator attention light approx 1 kg 2 2 lbs Security E shredding option provides HDD erase functionality Optional removable engine HDD Maximum power consumption 2 68 kW TEC imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO 17 48 KWh imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9065S PRO 16 00 KWh Power requirements PRISMAsync controller also feeding operating panel oper ator warning light 100 240 VAC 10 5 A 50 60Hz imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO Cg9065S PRO 208 VAC 15 A 60 Hz Environmental Specification Value Sound power level Standby mode 58 dB Print mode 75 dB Ozo
124. a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executa bles containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work und
125. a to the Media catalog ceeeeeeeees 148 Perform a media reQiStration cccceceeeseceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 149 Change the job settings before printing cceecessseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 151 Change the number Of Sets 2 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 151 Check the first S t ccccsscessssssesseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseessseesssnnseneeed 152 Change the use of Separator SheetS ccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 154 Stack the prints With an OffS t ccccccceeceeesssessessesssseanseeeseeeeeeees 155 Combine Jo DSi riesia iaie taana a a aaaea taea 157 Change the output settings before printing cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee teeta 159 Contents Change 2 sided into 1 sided and vice VEIrSa ccsscccecsceeeeeeeeees 159 Change the binding CdGEC cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeesneaeeeeeees 160 Select a different media fOr a jOD ccccccceesscessesseseesesssneeaneeeeneeees 161 Change the settings for COVEIS ccccccessceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenneeeeeeeeas 162 Shift the image roughly to create binding SPaCE ccccccceeeeeees 163 Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the lay OU besiccenuisdecwansiaaacesiateuasvane saueeanccudaesdeeeans smunnwndandenduansbaniereneuaaunensoeddaiacainn 164 Change the print delivery SettingS ccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 166 Chan
126. achine is idle There are no jobs scheduled for printing mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 Chapter 2 Main parts 31 The copy tray The copy tray Introduction The Copy Tray P1 collects the prints The copy tray is optional and the availability differs per country Illustration 16 The copy tray Components and their functions Copy tray components and their functions No Function Auxiliary Tray Pull out the auxiliary tray if you are printing on large paper 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm A3 B4 A4 A4R Bs B5R AsR and Custom size 139 7 mm x 182 0 mm to 330 2 mm x 487 7 mm 13 x19 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 12 x 18 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR EXEC and Custom size 5 x 7 1 8 to 13 x 19 1 4 Output Tray Prints are output to this tray mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 32 Chapter 2 Main parts Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Introduction P Stack and staple prints with the optional Staple Finisher A1 and optional Booklet Finisher A1 You can also saddle stich and trim booklets with the optional Booklet Finisher A1 Punch holes in your prints with the optional Punch Unit BG1 BH1 BF1 IMPORTANT m Ifyou create a saddle stitched booklet using coated paper or inserted sheets for the cover the image printed on the page after the cover may stick to the ba
127. ack staple cartridges Close the staple case cover Return the staple case to its original position in the saddle stitcher unit making sure to align the arrow on the staple case with the arrow on the saddle stitcher unit as shown below 314 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit When returning the staple case always make sure that the staple case is inserted until the arrows are aligned as shown in the diagram IMPORTANT Follow steps 3 to 7 to replace the other staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit Gently push the saddle stitcher unit back into the printer Always make sure to insert the saddle stitcher as far as it can go I See A CAUTION When returning the saddle stitcher unit to its original position be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 315 Replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit 10 Close the front cover of the finisher A CAUTION When closing the front cover of the finisher be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury 316 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Introduction to the Setup section System settings access through the op erator panel Introduction to the Setup
128. ake some time for the paper deck to open even when pressing the Open button 252 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Adjust the media size for the paper module 2 Squeeze the lever as shown below Without releasing the lever slide the outer size change plate and inner size change plate until they do not catch onto the paper you are setting 3 Load the desired paper until approximately 10 mm 3 8 in height Slide the outer size change plate and inner size change plate to align them with the desired paper size GL ar Wy TAN RA 7 IPY If you use a paper whose parallel edge to the feeding direction is longer than 457 2 mm 18 slide the paper holder plate to the right edge press the button on the paper holder plate then fold down the paper holder plate M If the paper holder plate is folded down proceed to step 6 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 253 Adjust the media size for the paper module O IMPORTANT Do not subject the paper holder plate to shocks when loading paper into the paper tray as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the printer O IMPORTANT Adjust the guides correctly to avoid causing a paper jam dirtying prints or dirtying the inside of the printer 4 Slide the paper holder plate to align it with the desired paper size as shown below 5 Load all remaining paper into the paper deck Load the pa
129. ams occur follow the instructions on the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper In addition make sure that the loaded paper is not curled Paper curls must be straightened out prior to loading m A screen asking you to load paper also appears if the paper deck is not fully inserted to the printer Make sure the paper deck is properly in place Do not load the following types of paper into the paper deck Doing so may cause a paper jam Severely curled or wrinkled paper Thin straw paper Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer Do not print on the reverse side of this paper either m Fan the stack of paper well before loading it and align the edges of the paper stack ona flat surface m Paper Deck Unit A1 can only accommodate paper from 52 to 220 g m 14 lb bond to 80 lb cover in weight m POD Deck Lite A1 can only accommodate paper from 52 to 300 g m 14 lb bond to 110 lb cover in weight Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 257 Load the media into the bulk paper modules P NOTE m The following paper sizes can be loaded into Paper Deck Unit A1 and POD Deck Lite A1 Paper Deck Unit A1 A4 Bs LTR POD Deck Lite A1 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm A3 B4 A4 A4R and Bs 13 x 19 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 12 x 18 11 x 17 LGL LTR and LTRR Ifa message prompting you to load paper appears during printing the remaining prints are automat
130. aper tray is open The paper guides inside the paper tray do not match the selected media size You must correct the paper guides or the selected media E or The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge LEF E or short edge SEF 5 The small icons indicate A4 Letter or A4 Letter like media The large icons indicate A3 Ledger or A3 Ledger like media When you defined a color for a media the icon can have that color The paper tray is in use for one or more scheduled jobs The paper tray contains tab sheets The paper tray contains tab sheets that must be processed as inserts p The paper tray contains inserts The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge LEF The paper tray contains media that are fed over the short edge SEF mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 mThe paper module on page 19 mBulk paper modules on page 21 mLoad the media using the Schedule view on page 137 mLoad the media using the Trays view on page 142 Chapter 6 Print jobs 141 Load the media using the Trays view Load the media using the Trays view Introduction This section describes how to load the media into a paper tray When you load the media via the Load button in the Schedule the paper tray is auto matically assigned to the correct media When you load and assign the media via the Assign butto
131. argin By default the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical Widening the margin can be useful if you want to staple or punch the output for example Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do not need additional space for stapling or punching the output for example If you want to define a different value for each side press The icon changes to the unlocked status Now you can define the values for the front side and the back side separately Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or ver tically By default the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical If you want to define a different value for each side press The icon changes to the unlocked status Now you can define the values for the front side and the back side separately Chapter 7 Copy jobs 183 Description of the copy job settings Output settings Print delivery Setting Values Description Print deliv Outputloca Select the output location for the job Depending on ery tion the settings for your print job the machine automati cally suggests the preferred output location for your job However you can manually overrule this sugges tion m Stacker stapler upper tray Deliver the prints at the upper tray of the stack
132. arty software The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions Table of Software Names of Software License Terms and Conditions of the License Device Driver for Marvell Yukon GNU General Public License Version 2 gt GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE on page 419 ALSA Library GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 atk gt GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE on page 426 glib OSGi Release 4 Eclipse Public License v 1 0 gt Eclipse Public License v 1 0 on page 436 TrouSerS COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 gt COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 on page 441 Chapter 13 Third party software 395 The Apache Software License Version 1 1 The Apache Software License Version 1 1 396 This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org and is subject to the following terms and conditions Copyright c 2001 The Apache Software Foundation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3
133. asking you to load paper also appears if the selected paper tray is not fully inserted into the printer Make sure that the paper drawer is properly in place m Do not load the following types of paper into the paper drawers Doing so may cause a paper jam Severely curled or wrinkled paper Envelopes Thin straw paper Heavy paper more than 221 g m 59 lb bond Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer Do not print on the reverse side of this paper either m Fan the stack of paper well before loading it and align the edges of the paper stack ona flat surface m Never place paper or any other items into the empty part of the drawer next to the paper stack Doing so may cause paper jams m Fan the stack of paper well before loading it Paper such as thin paper recycled paper prepunched paper heavy paper transparencies and tab paper should be fanned particularly well before loading Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 237 Load the media into the integrated paper trays NOTE m Ifa message prompting you to load paper appears during printing the remaining prints are automatically made after you load the correct paper If you select another paper drawer the remaining prints are made after you press OK The following paper sizes can be loaded into paper drawers Left and right paper drawers A4 Bs LTR Paper drawers 3 and 4 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 45
134. ata of the objects in the document An output profile is used to define colors in a device independent way Maintain the Output profiles 1 From the navigation bar select the color tab 2 From the color tab select Output profiles The Output profiles window appears iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller 4 Logout Help Colour Preferences Workflow Configuration Colour defaults Colour pre sets Input profiles Output profiles Spot colours output profiles 2l X amp amp Edit Delete Import Export Name Description Factory default Coated Extra heavy HT_Fine ED v1 0 Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Coated exYes Coated Extra heavy HT_Normal v1 0 Canon iR ADV C90005 PRO series Coated eies Coated Normal Heavy HT_Fine ED v1 0 Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Coated nes Coated Normal Heavy HT_Normal v1 0 Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Coated nives Uncoated Extra heavy HT_Fine ED v1 0 Canon iR ADV C90005 PRO series Uncoated Yes Uncoated Extra heavy HT_Normal v1 0 Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Uncoated Yes Uncoated Heavy HT_Fine ED v1 0 Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Uncoated Yes Uncoated Heavy HT_Normal v1 0 Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Uncoated Yes Uncoated Normal HT_Fine ED v1 0 Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Uncoated Yes Uncoated Normal HT_Normal v1 0 Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Uncoated Yes f u fia fia fia fia fia fia fia fia 143 The Output profiles window 3 From the
135. ated to Product X those performance claims and warranties are such Commercial Contributor s responsibil ity alone Under this section the Commercial Contributor would have to defend claims against the other Contributors related to those performance claims and warranties and if a court requires any other Contributor to pay any damages as a result the Commercial Contributor must pay those damages 5 NO WARRANTY 438 EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDI TIONS OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITH OUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Each Recipient is solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using and distributing the Program and assumes all risks associated with its exercise of rights under this Agreement including but not limited to the risks and costs of program Chapter 13 Third party software Eclipse Public License v 1 0 errors compliance with applicable laws damage to or loss of data programs or equipment and unavailability or interruption of operations 6 DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT NEITHER RECIP IENT NOR ANY CONTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUEN TIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST
136. automated workflow on page 334 mDelete an automated workflow on page 335 mRestore the factory default workflow on page 336 332 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Add an automated workflow Add an automated workflow Introduction The Settings Editor contains 1 factory default automated workflow However it can be beneficial for your productivity to add more automated workflows It is not compulsory to define all the settings When you put a check mark in front of a setting that setting and its values become enabled How to add an automated workflow 1 Go to Workflow gt Automated workflows 2 Click the Add button A pop up window displays the attributes you can specify for the new workflow 3 Puta check mark in front of the attributes you want to define 4 Specify or select the values of the attributes 5 Click Ok mIntroduction to automated workflows on page 331 wEdit an automated workflow on page 334 mDelete an automated workflow on page 335 mRestore the factory default workflow on page 336 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 333 Edit an automated workflow Edit an automated workflow Introduction You can change the attributes of an existing automated workflow NOTE It is not compulsory to define all the settings When you put a check mark in front of a setting that setting and its values become enabled How to edit an automa
137. avior Scan from the glass plate using the zoom function Illustration Description The original is placed face down and in readable form in the upper left hand corner on the glass plate The upper left hand corner of the glass plate is a fixed point and is used as the origin of the image Result on paper of a scan with a 100 zoom factor Result on paper of a scan with a 50 zoom factor m E NOTE The upper right hand corner of the image is fixed Result on paper of a scan with a 200 zoom factor NOTE The upper right hand corner of the image is fixed 206 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Create and use custom copy templates Create and use custom copy templates Introduction When you regularly carry out identical copy jobs you can create custom copy templates for these recurring jobs The custom templates contain the default settings for these jobs You can carry out the following actions m Creating a Custom Template m Use a custom template m Delete a custom template Rename a custom template a Make a custom template your default custom template How to create and edit custom copy templates hw NR Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Copy job Touch amp to enter the template section Touch the custom template called Current for 2 seconds Select Save The system saves the custom template as Custom followed by a number that is not yet in use
138. awer Pa per Deck A1 Document Inser tion Unit H1 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load reverse order tab paper face down with the tabs to the left side Load right order tab paper face up with the tabs to the right side Load reverse order tab paper face down with the tabs to the left side Load tab paper into the paper tray Load tab paper into the paper tray Introduction This section describes how to load tab paper into the paper tray Load tab paper into the paper tray 1 Press and release the button on the paper drawer in which you want to load tab paper Os 2 Grip the handle then pull out the paper drawer until it stops Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 289 Load tab paper into the paper tray 290 3 Remove the tab paper guide from its holder by sliding it to the left and lifting it then place it as shown below O IMPORTANT m Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use m Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark at the back of the paper drawer 5 Squeeze the lever on the front guide as shown in the illustration While squeezing the lever slide the front guide until it fits the tab Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load tab paper into the paper tray Set the left guide to A4 LTR if necessary Gently push the
139. b such transferee agrees in writing to be bound by all these conditions 6 You may not decrypt decompile reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the SOFTWARE to human readable form 7 You may not modify adapt translate rent lease or loan the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE 8 You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT 9 The human readable portion the source code of the SOFTWARE is not licensed to you Notwithstanding 1 through 9 above in case any other license conditions accompany third party software modules these software modules are subject to these other conditions as well ACCEPTANCE 392 THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE STATED HERE OR IN RE LATED WARRANTY PROVISIONS SHALL BE DEEMED ACCEPTED UPON YOUR USE OF THE PRODUCT FOR ONE OR MORE OF ITS NORMAL PUR POSES IF THERE HAS BEEN NO OTHER PRIOR EXPRESS ACCEPTANCE Chapter 13 Third party software Third Party Software THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE GOVERN THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AS DELIVERED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ALL UPDAT ED VERSIONS OF THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDED UNDER MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS OR OTHER SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE PRODUCT WITH CANON USA OR CANON CANADA OR THEIR RE SPECTIVE AUTHORIZED SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS Chapter 13 Third party software 393 The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions The Software Subject
140. b Access Software includes modules developed by Independent JPEG Group This product contains Adobe Flash Player technology under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright C 1995 2003 Adobe Systems Inc All rights reserved Adobe and Adobe Flash are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc in the United States and or other countries http www adobe com software flash about Chapter 1 Preface 9 Copyright Copyright Copyright 2011 by Canon Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording or by any infor mation storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc 2011 Oc All rights reserved No part of this work may be reproduced copied adapted or transmit ted in any form or by any means without written permission from Oc Oc makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Furthermore Oc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes This product includes software and or software modules that are licensed by Canon Inc or its licensors from third parties Use and distribut
141. b and touch Print now How to print an urgent job immediately Touch Jobs gt Queues If collapsed first touch to expand the list of Scheduled jobs Touch the job which you want to print immediately hw bY Press Print now The urgent job appears at the top of the list of Scheduled jobs The active print job amp is paused as soon as the current set is ready and becomes second in the list mGive priority to a print job on page 120 Chapter 6 Print jobs 119 Give priority to a print job Give priority to a print job Introduction When you want to print a job as soon as possible but not necessarily immediately you must use the To top function The To top function moves the selected job to the second position in the list of Scheduled jobs below the active print job The job will be printed when the active print job amp is ready How to give priority to a print job 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues 2 Ifcollapsed first touch to expand the list of Scheduled jobs 3 Touch the job to which you want to give priority 4 Press To top mPrint an urgent job immediately on page 119 120 Chapter 6 Print jobs Print a scheduled job later Print a scheduled job later Introduction The machine prints the print jobs and copy jobs that are present in the list of Scheduled jobs jobs However you can decide to print a job later fo
142. careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Be aware that the light emitted from the glass plate may be very bright when closing the feeder IMPORTANT Do not dampen the cloth too much as this may damage the original or break the machine Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 351 Clean the wire Clean the wire Introduction If streaks appear on printed output or parts of the printed image are missing clean the corona assembly wires inside the main unit m It takes approximately 35 seconds to clean the wires a Wire cleaning cannot be performed during printing Clean the wire 1 Touch System gt Maintenance 2 Press Start maintenance 3 Touch Clean the corona wires and touch Start A wizard opens 4 Press Next A status message displays 5 Press Finish 6 Touch Stop to close the Maintenance tasks menu Result If the procedure displays an engine error contact your local service representative 352 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Clean the roller Clean the roller Introduction If dirt or streaks appear on printed output clean the roller inside of the main unit NOTE m It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the roller m Roller cleaning cannot be performed during printing Clean the roller main unit 1 Touch System gt Maintenance 2 Press Start maintenance
143. cccceeeecceeeeeceeeeseessseesseeeceseeeaneeeeeceeseeseeeeess 86 The JODS ViCW ccsscscesssessssneeeneeeeceeeeeeceeeseseesesseessessecenaueeeeauseeeneeeeeeess 87 Contents The TRAYS WIG Wssiee sashes scasisecescescedentecdencedssacdedvadndaseandadecusdace aiae iaaa 89 The System VICW c scsccesssssnssecenseeeeceeeeeceeeeeeseesssessseesseceneauanseanseeeseeees 90 Chapter 5 Power InfOrmatiOmiiccescscccicsccccecccscesdeveceseesies ve Siscnsscccnedecectheeeed cdevesaesessseereeawetel 93 The power buttons and power MOAES cssscsesseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 94 Turn On the controller sociare aiuta 96 Turn ON the printen a aena aa aaa A Eaa 97 Turn Off the printe esna a a A Ea 98 Use the Sleep MOdEC ccsssssesssnccnseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseessecneaneneeaneeeeeeess 99 Chapter 6 Print JODS oeaiei eaaa ai aaae aaeain 101 General NformatiON sceccccscscsccvercsaaeveeusneed seseesceecccesssendadtetenserssacdeuedsneessains 102 Introduction to the print fUNCTION c cssscecsteeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 102 Description of the print job SettiNgS c cecsceeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeees 104 Contradiction Nandling ccccccceeessceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 118 Manage print JODS cccccccessessssssseessneaneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseesssseeeesneaes 119 Print an urgent job immMedCiately ccc csssscecsceeseeeeeeeseeeseeseseess 119 Give priority tO a print JOD
144. ccess to the other system functions are not visible However you can access the other functions while you define the settings for your copy job or scan job NOTE The machine will remember all the job settings you already defined How to access other functions and get back to your job 1 In the job window touch Minimize The Copy Scan view appears The navigation buttons at the bottom of the operator panel become visible and accessible 2 Carry out the desired actions 3 To get back to your job window touch Jobs 4 Press Resume job Chapter 7 Copy jobs 203 The zoom behavior The zoom behavior Introduction When you carry out a copy job or scan job you can use the Zoom function to reduce or enlarge an image for example Copy an A4 LTR original on an A3 11 x 17 sheet The system enlarges the image Copy an A3 11 x 17 original on an A4 LTR sheet The system reduces the image Copy an A4 LTR original with a small illustration on an A4 LTR sheet and at the same time enlarge the illustration By factory default the zoom function is set to Fit to page This makes sure that no infor mation is lost To change the zoom factor manually touch the and buttons of the Zoom function in the job window If you use non standard size originals you must use the glass plate The zoom function for originals in the automatic document feeder is different from the zoom function for originals o
145. ce Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 243 Adjust the integrated paper tray to hold a different paper size 3 Squeeze the lever on the front guide as shown below Without releasing the lever slide the front guide to align it with the mark for the desired paper size Front Guide Slide the guide until it clicks into place O IMPORTANT Adjust the guides correctly to avoid causing a paper jam dirtying prints or dirtying the inside of the printer 4 Load the appropriate paper into the paper drawer A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper 5 Adjust the paper size label to show the new paper size 6 Gently push the paper tray back into the printer until it clicks into place in the closed position A CAUTION When returning the paper drawer to its original position be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury 244 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the paper module Load the media into the paper module Introduction Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 provides three additional paper trays You can load up to 2000 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 lb bond per tray This section describes how to load the media into the paper tray module When you load the media via the Load button in the Schedule the media is automat ically assigned to the correc
146. cement 1 Place the original face down 1 Place the original face down Chapter 7 Copy jobs 197 Put originals on the glass plate Put originals on the glass plate 1 Lift the feeder 306 Sensor 1 1 Sensor O IMPORTANT This printer is equipped with an Open Close sensor on the feeder see circled area in the above illustration When placing originals onto the glass plate lift the feeder approximately 300 mm 11 7 8 so that the sensor detaches from the feeder If the sensor does not detach from the feeder the size of the originals may not be detected correctly 2 Place your originals face down top edge of your original with the back edge of the glass plate by the arrow in the upper left corner 198 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Put originals on the glass plate Place books and other bound originals onto the glass plate in the same way NOTE When you are enlarging an A4 B5 As5 LTR STMT original onto A3 B 11 x 17 LGL paper place the original horizontally onto the glass plate and align it with the A4R BsR As5R LTRR STMTR marks Gently close the feeder A CAUTION Close the feeder gently to avoid getting your hands caught as this may result in personal injury Do not press down hard on the feeder when using the glass plate to make copies of thick books Doing so may damage the glass plate and r
147. change plate of POD Deck Lite A1 m If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load follow those instructions m When paper is loaded into the paper deck the side facing up is the one printed on m If problems occur such as poor print quality or paper jams try turning the paper stack over and reload it However you cannot turn textured or 1 sided coated paper over Change this paper instead 5 Lower the feeding support roller If Paper Deck Unit A1 is attached proceed to step 6 6 Gently push the paper tray back into the printer until it clicks into place in the closed position The inside lifter automatically rises and prepares the paper deck for feeding Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 261 Load the media into the bulk paper modules A CAUTION When closing the paper deck be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury mLoading transparencies on page 285 wAdjust the media size for the bulk paper module on page 263 262 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module Introduction This section explains how to change the paper size for the optional POD Deck Lite A1 Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module 1 Press the Open button to open the paper deck per size sheet and deck
148. ck of the cover or back of the inserted sheets depending on the type of coated paper you are using m Ifyou create a saddle stitched booklet or staple using coated paper or inserted sheets for the cover the copy sets may dirty the surface toner streaks of the cover depending the type of coated paper you are using m Ifyou create a saddle stitched booklet using coated paper for the cover cracks may appear around the fold of the cover depending on the type of coated paper you are using m Ifyou staple multiple copy sets using coated paper for the cover the staples of the copy sets may dirty the surface of the cover of the copy sets that have already been output depending on the type of coated paper you are using NOTE The name of the puncher unit may differ according to region Components and their functions external view Booklet Finisher A1 Buffer Pass Unit F1 Staple Finisher A1 17 External view Chapter 2 Main parts 33 Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Stacker stapler components and their functions Buffer Pass Unit F1 standard Buffer Pass Unit F1 is required to attach Staple Finisher A1 or Booklet Finisher A1 to the main unit Open Buffer Pass Unit F1 to remove jammed paper Front Cover of Staple Finisher A1 Booklet Finisher A1 Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge remove jammed paper or clear a staple jam from the stapler unit and saddle stitcher unit
149. consist of these different media sizes Last used Reuse the settings of the previous copy job for your new copy job You cannot use Last used when the previous job was a scan job or a combined copy job mCreate and use custom copy templates on page 207 m Work with the workflow profiles on page 320 Chapter 7 Copy jobs 171 Description of the copy job settings Description of the copy job settings Introduction When you make a copy you must define the following m The characteristics of the paper originals m The characteristics of the output m Generic settings that apply to the whole job When you started the copy job by selecting one of the factory default templates or by selecting a custom template some of the settings have already been changed Furthermore the system links a number of logical settings for the Original and the Output automatically However you can overrule these automated settings manually The auto mated settings have the prefix Auto 172 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Illustration Auto Top lett Adjust image v C amp B 00 Color 0 0 234 The settings window for copy jobs Number Pane Description Original The Original pane shows the settings you can define for the paper originals Output The Output pane shows the s
150. copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with m c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution m d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place m e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating sys
151. copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or dis tribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indi cate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the re cipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of pa
152. d m All the changes in the default workflow will be lost How to restore the factory default workflow 1 Go to Workflow gt Automated workflows 2 Click the Restore button The factory default automated workflow is restored mlntroduction to automated workflows on page 331 wAdd an automated workflow on page 333 mEdit an automated workflow on page 334 mDelete an automated workflow on page 335 336 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Introduction to hotfolders Hotfolders Introduction to hotfolders Introduction Technically a hotfolder is a mapped network drive on a workstation that is linked to a shared folder on the PRISMAsync controller For an operator a hotfolder is a folder on a workstation where printable files can be dropped for printing Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring PDF workflows In these workflows identical PDFs or other printable files with identical settings are printed on a regular basis Hot folders should not be used in combination with print job tickets The job settings for hotfolders The settings of a hotfolder can be defined by m a hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder itself or m the automated workflow to which the hotfolder is linked It is advisable to use the hotfolder functionality in combination with the hotfolder default ticket However if you want to use the settings of the automated workflow where the hotfolder is linked to it
153. d ii are not derivative works of the Program Contributor means any person or entity that distributes the Program Licensed Patents mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the use or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program Program means the Contributions distributed in accordance with this Agreement Recipient means anyone who receives the Program under this Agreement including all Contributors 2 GRANT OF RIGHTS 436 a Subject to the terms of this Agreement each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non exclusive worldwide royalty free copyright license to reproduce prepare derivative works of publicly display publicly perform distribute and sublicense the Contribution of such Contributor if any and such derivative works in source code and object code form b Subject to the terms of this Agreement each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under Licensed Patents to make use sell offer to sell import and otherwise transfer the Contribution of such Contributor Chapter 13 Third party software Eclipse Public License v 1 0 if any in source code and object code form This patent license shall apply to the combi nation of the Contribution and the Program if at the time the Contribution is added by the Contributor such addition of the Contribution causes such combination to be cov
154. decrease the brightness from level 20 to 100 in steps of 1 The factory default value is 80 Higher values will increase the brightness Contrast You can increase or decrease the contrast from level 10 to 100 in steps of 1 The factory default value is 50 Higher values will increase the contrast How to adjust the brightness and contrast of the operator panel 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Operator panel settings 2 Touch Auto adjust to optimize the brightness and contrast of the screen automatically 3 Touch OK when the brightness and contrast are OK or continue with the steps below when these settings are not yet OK 4 Touch to decrease or to increase the Brightness 5 Touch to decrease or to increase the Contrast 6 Press OK Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 327 Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel Introduction 328 NOTE The information contained in this section is primarily intended for key operators and system administrators The Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller is a web based application that allows key operators and system administrators to adapt the system completely to the situation in an organization and production environment The Settings Editor allows key operators and system administrators to manage settings with regard to netw
155. defined as the following set of individuals Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is supplied AS IS The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc disclaim all warranties expressed or implied including without limitation the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc assume no liability for direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library even if advised of the possibility of such damage x Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this source code or portions hereof for any purpose without fee subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented 2 Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source 3 This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc specifically permit without fee and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products If you use this source code in a product acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated Chapter 13 Third part
156. defined in the Settings Editor The procedure below describes the manual way How to use the sleep mode 1 To put the printer into the sleep mode press the Sleep button N at the right hand side of the operator panel The printer will go into the sleep mode when the list of Scheduled jobs is empty To put the printer into the sleep mode sooner use the Stop after job function 2 To wake up the printer from the sleep mode press the Sleep button l again The printer will warm up The warming up time depends on how long the printer was in the sleep mode Chapter 5 Power information 99 Use the Sleep mode 100 Chapter 5 Power information Chapter 6 Print jobs Introduction to the print function General information Introduction to the print function Introduction 102 Print jobs can be sent from the following locations m The printer driver a PRISMAprepare From the printer itself copy job Depending on the workflow settings the print job will appear in one of the following destinations m List of Waiting jobs m List of Scheduled jobs The list of Printed jobs can store jobs temporarily The Schedule view enables you to plan your daily print jobs The Jobs view enables you to manage the print jobs in the different queues Chapter 6 Print jobs Introduction to the print function Introduction to the print function Queues i 3 scheduled 1 waiting
157. der _ 2 Tri Fold Out mode Each sheet of A4R LTRR paper is folded in a tri fold out Paper folded in a tri fold out is output to the exit slot of the paper folding unit Chapter 2 Main parts 55 Folder NOTE The tri fold out areas are shown in the illustration below Glass plate i Feeder ABC e Double Parallel Fold mode Each sheet of A4R LTRR paper is folded in a double parallel fold Paper folded in a double parallel fold is output to the exit slot of the paper folding unit 56 Chapter 2 Main parts Folder Voa Leadi tage A B C D Length j AAR lt _ feeding Direction The double parallel folded areas are shown in the illustration below Glass plate fi Folding methods and output locations Folding methods Output location Stacker sta Folder pler Z Fold Y Half Fold y Tri fold in Tri fold out VA Double parallel fold mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 Chapter 2 Main parts 57 Folder 58 C
158. der A CUIV ACE a e EA TETE ROR 338 Create shared network drive ccccccceeeeees 340 Define job settings scisisiioroiene ieis 342 Dras SC drop in aE R 337 General information csccssessessesseseeseeseees 337 Include in automated workflow ccccceee 339 JObsSCtt S s cssissesss cesisssessscasesssssasevivvsasgosersiuss 337 JOB ticket s dineren eagra 337 l Image reader Clean nar EE tee 347 Image shift Image Shift seroraren ia 164 Inner Booklet Trimmer A1 Inner Booklet Trimmer A1 ccccesesseseeeeee 33 Input profiles Tniput protiles s csccissosssseesssssssosseesssscotecesststerse 72 Inserter VASCPSH os 2c lacentdadesosszesstantveceveseds tes siri is 49 Load media orreri narn Ea 272 Insertion unit Tnsertion UNIT eiscsceseeessseiscisssassdes Rvteveeeseiseaseesed 49 Integrated paper tray Change paper Size seisin 243 Load media ssecacdiseytsttedesis dessaciscassdaveatsiostenns 237 Job Change alignment peee Change binding edge cceceeeeseeeteeees Change finishing method Change number of sets Change settings for covers Change the media 0 Ch cle thefirst sets Give Priory sis siresi nair aei assia Make a proof seracrasununnnnrioseosi Print later 0 csscsscsssatesssesedssases ocaesssatsssevieebetiess Print the job parameters Reprint sis scacsssstissesthetsteacesissass icsassenstvsevesients Separator sheets x esesesssseisssesnsssseaicosonsssbessoscess Shift the imag e e
159. dia into the special feeder multipurpose tray Introduction The optional special feeder allows you to print on tracing paper labels and envelopes O IMPORTANT m Note the following points when using the special feeder Paper quantity 1 to approximately 100 sheets 80 g m2 22 lb bond stack ap proximately 11 mm 3 8 high Paper sizes 100 0 x 148 0 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm Paper sizes 4 x 5 7 8 to 13 x 19 1 4 Paper Weight 52 to 300 g m 14 lb bond to 110 lb cover Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use to allow the paper to feed smoothly through the special feeder allowable curl amount less than 10 mm 3 8 for normal paper less than 5 mm 1 5 for heavy paper There are some types of paper stock that may meet the above specifications but cannot be fed into the special feeder Do not load different size type paper at the same time m When using tracing paper or coated paper feed the paper one sheet at a time and remove each sheet as it is delivered to the output tray Loading several sheets of paper together may cause paper jams m When printing on special types of paper such as heavy paper or transparencies be sure to correctly set the paper type especially if you are using heavy paper If the type of paper is not set correctly it could adversely affect the quality of the image Moreover the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair or the pape
160. dia size for the bulk paper module NOTE When loading paper make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed 20 mm 13 16 If the height of the paper stack exceeds 20 mm 13 16 the edges of the paper stack may become curled or creased and poor print quality may result 18 Place a magnet label indicating the new paper size onto the paper deck 19 Close the paper deck The inside lifter automatically rises and prepares the paper deck for feeding A CAUTION When closing the paper deck be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury mLoad the media into the bulk paper modules on page 257 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 271 Load the media into the inserter Load the media into the inserter Introduction This section describes how to load media into the inserter Document Insertion Unit H1 Document Insertion Unit Staple Settings and Output Results Table The following table shows the effect of the cover position original position and the staple settings on the output How to place the cover sheet original Staple set Output re tings sults Top left 7 1 staple we Left edge A4 Bs LTR 2 staples Feeder Glass plate Document In sertion Unit
161. discard the punch waste discard the trim waste or clear paper or staple jams prints may still be output if other optional units are operating normally and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure m When the punch waste tray is full you cannot use the punching options NOTE This procedure is necessary only if Puncher Unit BG1 BH1 BF1 is attached Remove the punch waste of the punch unit 1 Open the front cover of the finisher Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 293 Remove the punch waste of the punch unit 2 Pull out the punch waste tray O IMPORTANT Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied 4 Return the punch waste tray to its original position Always make sure to insert the punch waste tray as far as it can go y y NOTE If the punch waste tray is not securely in place you cannot make copies or prints in the Hole Punch mode 294 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Remove the punch waste of the punch unit 5 Close the front cover of the finisher A CAUTION When closing the front cover of the finisher be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 295 Remove the trim waste Remove the trim waste Introduction This section describes how to remove trim waste from Booklet Finishe
162. e A1 occeeceececceseeseeseesseesseeees Check Punch waste box c ccccscessessessessessessessesseseens 292 Staple Cartridges 306 Toner level cceceeeeeeee 1299 Waste toner container ccesceesseeseeeseeeeeeneees 299 Check first set Check first Set ssccsicsscsicssscssssessessecoccsocssssseestent 152 Clean roller Gleam roller ancini arasi 353 Clean the operator panel Clean the operator panel s ss ssssssssisssssesseeseesees 26 Cleaning Cleaning seis sas cssssssosstcssendessaetsedeatocssessasacsiasaess ADE irssi Cover plate Drum Peder ranana nena a Glass plate Operator panelis sisissiisaeiiansa 356 CMYK calibration curve CMYK calibration curve ssssssssssssssssessessessee 368 Color O E EEE 226 Color pre sets Color pre sets Gonception Printer driver PRISMAprepare optional wee 15 color toner cartridge color toner cartridge sisscsssssccsssssusssosssnseseseecss 235 Color black and white GCOpy Jobert aT NE 188 Combine analog documents Combine analog documents cceeeee 229 Combine subsets Create 1 document ssssscecessaissssissisatonssveesestioss 202 Create FilS ke ankoraa rr 229 Concept CONCEP nmaa an EA E EETA 60 Connectivity Default gateway srein DHCP r a a E ENTENG DNS suffix follows domain occ Host hameren Link speed and connection type MAC address sissit Primary DNS suffix cennari Subnet mash serssmesnisnannn Test TCP IP connecti
163. e complete calibration procedure However you can perform an auto gradation procedure separately You are advised to run the 2 Auto gradation adjustment procedure separately after a toner bottle is replaced NOTE In case of a full system calibration make sure you use media from the same batch for 1 Shading correction and 2 Auto gradation adjustment procedure When to do Immediately after the 1 Shading correction procedure is finished The 2 Auto gradation adjustment procedure is part of the complete calibration procedure Before you begin Make sure you use one of the following media m Canon CS 814 81 4 g m Oc Top Colour FSC 100 g m m Mondi Neusiedler 100 g m m International Paper Hammermill 105 g m Calibrate the printer 2 Auto gradation adjustment 1 From the Calibration method window select Automatic internal sensor and touch OK An instruction window opens Wait a few minutes while the printer performs the 2 Auto gradation adjustment proce dure 2 Remove the test prints 3 Touch Next to continue with the 3 Media family calibration procedure 364 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Calibrate the printer 2 Auto gradation adjustment Perform the 2 Auto gradation adjustment procedure separately 1 2 3 aS Touch System gt Color management Press 2 Auto gradation adjustment Touch one of the fo
164. e configuration on page 16 mStop the printer on page 126 mlntroduction to the Schedule view on page 133 mThe operator attention light on page 30 Chapter 2 Main parts 29 The operator attention light The operator attention light Introduction The operator attention light on top of the printer helps you to monitor the status of the printer from a distance The colors of the lights match the printer status that the dashboard displays Illustration 15 The operator attention light Status colors The status colors of the operator attention light Description The machine has stopped for example because a required media type is not available or an error has occurred Operator attention is required now 30 Chapter 2 Main parts The operator attention light Description The machine will stop soon for example because more paper is required Operator attention is required soon The orange light illuminates when the machine reaches the warning time The warning time is a time you can set to determine when the orange light must illuminate You can set the warning time in the System section of the operator panel By factory default the warning time is set to 10 minutes So 10 minutes before operator attention is required the orange light will illuminate The machine is busy printing The machine can print longer than the set warning time Operator attention is not required All lights off The m
165. e controller Chapter 8 Scan jobs 227 Scan to USB Scan to USB How to use the Scan to USB function 228 1 Insert a USB drive into the USB port on the left side of the operator panel Place the originals face up into the ADF or place 1 original face down on the glass plate 3 Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Scan to USB The job window opens 4 Change the settings for the original and the file Touch Job name to change the default job name Use the keyboard to change the name then touch OK Touch Destination to indicate the folder on your USB drive where you want to save the file Ifapplicable enter the Account ID Touch Start The scanner scans the originals The system sends the resulting file to your USB drive Chapter 8 Scan jobs Combine subsets into one file Combine subsets into one file Introduction You can use the scan function of the machine to carry out all kinds of scan jobs You can carry out scan to file or scan to email jobs for example When the document contains non standard size media or when you want to combine various documents you can create a combined scan job All the different originals are then combined in 1 file This is com parable to combining several documents in a copy job The following situations can occur for example m You want to scan a document that consists of several parts called subsets that differ from eac
166. e exact number of sheets that is available in the paper trays Red The media is required now but not available The job can only start when you load the required media When you print small jobs the bars for these jobs may not be completely visible To prevent that you do not see the status of these small jobs the operator panel can show the following images When you set the zoom control 5 to a shorter time scale in most cases the operator panel will display bars for these small jobs The possible display of small jobs Image Description eo Green The required media is available Orange The media is required in the future but not available then For example because the paper trays do not contain suffi cient sheets of the required media E Red The media is required now but not available The job can only start when you load the required media 3 The media toolbar The media toolbar displays the following information for the media that is selected in the Required media pane Furthermore the media type toolbar contains the Load button to load and assign the required media 4 The output locations pane The output locations pane displays the output locations that are required for the scheduled jobs The bars show the availability of the output locations The bars can have the following colors Chapter 6 Print jobs 135 Introduction to the Schedule view The colors of the bars
167. e lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These dis advantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest pos sible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and t
168. e machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute correspond ing source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all Chapter 13 Third party software 421 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 422 modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accom panies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to
169. e media catalog does not contain media that match the position of the paper guides Select the media you loaded and touch OK to assign the media to the selected tray Chapter 6 Print jobs Load the media using the Trays view Result NOTE m To load media in a grayed out paper tray you can open the paper tray and load the media m You can use Unassign for example to prevent unnecessary printing on expensive media mLoad the media using the Schedule view on page 137 Chapter 6 Print jobs 143 Introduction to the Media section Introduction to the Media section Introduction This section gives an overview of the Media section in the System view Overview of the Media section Media Hormal a4 A4 60 ghr2 White Oce Red Label A4 A4 B0 gin White 4 Chinook Logo A4 A4 80 gim White Normal Letter Letter 8 5x11 80 gim White Normal A3 A3 80 gin White Custom 20x30 200 x 300 mm 80 gitn White 10xT 177 8 x 254 mm 80 gir White Adinsert J 4 insert 80 gim White A4 Tab A4Tab tab inclusive 80 g m White 229 Overview of the Media section The items of the Media section Description of the Media section Num Item Function ber 1 List of all the media Display the current content of the Media catalog
170. e right hand side of the operator panel if the system was shut down from the operator panel m Press the on off button of the controller The controller needs about 1 minute to start up mTurn on the printer on page 97 96 Chapter 5 Power information Turn on the printer Turn on the printer Introduction You are advised to turn on the system in the following order 1 The controller 2 The printer How to turn on the printer 1 Put the main power switch on the upper right side of the main unit in the I position 2 If required wait until the controller is ready 3 Press the Sleep button at the right hand side of the operator panel Chapter 5 Power information 97 Turn off the printer Turn off the printer Introduction You are advised to turn off the system in the following order 1 The controller 2 The printer How to turn off the printer 1 Touch System gt Setup gt Shut down system 2 Select Shut down to shut down the controller and printer 3 Put the main power switch on top of the main unit in the I position 98 Chapter 5 Power information Use the Sleep mode Use the Sleep mode Introduction When you do not need the printer for a while the printer can go into the sleep mode The power consumption in the sleep mode is very low The printer can enter the sleep mode in 2 ways m Automatically m Manually The timers and settings for the automatic way can be
171. e when you access the copy function When you select one of these templates the system sets the typical settings for the selected type of copy job automatically Next you can define all other settings for the originals and the output The illustration and the table below show the factory default templates you can use to start a copy job Illustration 170 i Copy job 4 J in Combined copy job g g Q nting i PDF viewing archiving POF printing 600 dpi 300 dpi foileton O Schedule Jobs Trays BS System 233 The copy templates at the upper row Chapter 7 Copy jobs Introduction to the copy function The factory default templates Overview of the templates Template When to use Copy job Copy originals that have the same media size and only re quire simple settings for example 2 sided or a staple Combined copy job Combine several sets of originals and create 1 single copy job When you select this template the possibility to add subsets is already displayed Booklet job Create booklets from paper originals When you select this template m The Layout setting is set to Booklet and m The Media setting is set to A3 11 x 17 because the system assumes you want to create booklets of A4 LTR originals Mixed size Copy a set of originals that consists of different media sizes The output will also
172. eate derivative works of distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project in both source and object code forms and derivative works thereof for any purpose and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein subject to the following conditions m Redistribution of source code must retain this license file FTL TXT unaltered any additions deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accom panying documentation The copyright notices of the unaltered original files must be preserved in all copies of source files Chapter 13 Third party software 403 The FreeType Project LICENSE 404 m Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team in the distribution documentation We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documenta tion though this isn t mandatory These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project not just the unmodified files If you use our work you must acknowledge us However no fee need be paid to us 3 Advertising Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial advertising or promotional purposes without specific prior written per mission We suggest but do not require that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your d
173. eca cevedsicececsscveanselsacscsvinnsecaceceeieadin 339 Create a shared network folder on a workstatiOn csccccccceeeeees 340 Create a hotfolder default ticket default_ticket jdf cccccee 342 Chapter 11 Maintenance and Calibration cccccssssssceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseesssessseeeeaeeaaes 343 Introduction to the Maintenance SECTION ccsssccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 344 ROUTING clea Ni Ngana aaae aaa eaaa a EEEN 346 Contents IEFOODUGCHION s annaa aaa ea AE E AAA 346 Clean the glass plate and underside the feedel cccccccccccceeeees 347 Clean the automatic document feeder ADF csscccccceeeeeeeeees 348 Clean the WIIC cccceccessssssesssessneecaneeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseeessessssnneaaeneesseeess 352 Clean the roll tississtsssstvvccwndeceddeceseantiatthabiicidddeclaadesteuseecieteiaideedeeaddens 353 Clean the automatic document feeder rollers cssccccceceeeeeeees 354 Clean the OCU vcssescaccccss ceinden cts cescacccedecansaautastadasavseduaccasscctssabeaztadeness 355 Clean the Operator Panel ccccccccccccccccccccecssscesssesssseecssseesneeeeeeeeeeess 356 MalINt Nan CO ictstsicaceesccace cetcns a a aaar aiad a Seta a adada aAA 357 Reset the day COUNTELSS ccccccceesseeseeseeesennsnseceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeesseess 357 Find the meter readings COUNTEIS ccceeeeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 358 Handle paper jarmS cccccccccccccceceescee
174. ecifically designed for use in Canon Multi Functional machines Expe rience the benefits of optimal print performance print volume and high quality outputs achieved through Canon s new advanced technologies Therefore the use of Canon genuine consumables is recommended for your Canon Multi Functional machines Go to http www canon europe com consumables to understand the secret behind Canon s Consumable products Genuine Supplies for North American region Canon has developed and manufactured Toner Parts and Supplies specifically for use in this machine For optimal print quality and for optimal machine performance and productivity we recommend that you use Genuine Canon Toner Parts and Supplies Contact your Canon Authorized Dealer or Service Provider for Genuine Canon Supplies Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the integrated paper trays Loading paper Load the media into the integrated paper trays Introduction This section describes how to load the media into the integrated paper trays When you load the media via the Load button in the Schedule the media is automat ically assigned to the correct tray When you load and assign the media via the Assign button in the Trays view you must assign the loaded media to the corresponding paper tray manually A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper O IMPORTANT m A screen
175. ect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits mor
176. ed The printer cannot always detect the size of the original if it is nonstandard paper size such as a book In this case specify the size at which you want to scan the original Two sided originals can also be scanned as two sided documents You can place the following originals into the ADF m Weight One sided scanning 38 to 220 g m 10 lb bond to 80 lb cover Two sided scanning 50 to 220 g m 13 lb bond to 80 lb cover However if you are scanning in color 64 to 220 g m 17 lb bond to 80 lb cover paper can be used for both 1 sided and 2 sided scanning m Size A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R As A5R and BOR 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT or STMTR m Tray Capacity 300 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 lb bond m Thin originals may become creased if used in a high temperature or high humid ity environment m Do not place the following types of originals into the feeder Originals with tears or large binding holes Severely curled originals originals with sharp folds clipped or stapled originals Carbon backed paper or other originals which may not feed smoothly Transparencies and other highly transparent originals m Ifthe same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly the original may fold or become creased and make feeding impossible Limit repeated feeding to a maxi mum of 30 times this number varies depending on the type and quality of the original m Ifthe feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals writt
177. ed or use new transparencies When printing onto transparencies image density may be high depending on the image type In this case adjust the output image density Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 285 Loading transparencies NOTE You can load up to 250 transparencies in a paper source other than the special feeder If a paper jam occurs remove the transparencies and fan them well before reloading them into the paper tray 286 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Loading tab paper Loading tab paper Introduction This section describes how to load tab paper You can load tab paper into the following paper source m Paper trays 3 and 4 of the main unit mw Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Document Insertion Unit H1 IMPORTANT Only A4 LTR tab paper can be used There are two kinds of tab paper right order tab paper and reverse order tab paper Right Order Tab Paper Reverse Order Tab Paper NOTE m You cannot make copies or prints on tab paper that is loaded into Document In sertion Unit H1 m You can use the tab paper set in Document Insertion Unit H1 for Add Cover Insert Sheets or Job Separator m Ifyou want to insert printed tab paper as chapter pages insert a blank paper where the tab paper will be inserted Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 287 Loading tab paper Loading tab paper per tray 288 Paper source How to load tab paper Paper drawer Multi Dr
178. ed to the Other Conditions 394 Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below for more detail and corresponding license conditions Table of Software Names of Software License Terms and Conditions of the License HttpClientz o Alphai Release The Apache Software License Version 1 1 gt The Apache Software License Version 1 1 on page 396 Crypto API Bouncy Castle License gt Bouncy Castle License on page 397 expat MIT License gt MIT License on page 400 fontconfig gt fontconfig on page 401 freetype2 The FreeType Project LICENSE pango part of OpenTypeCode The FreeType Project LICENSE on page 402 J2ME gt J2ME on page 405 gt libpng on page 406 Adobe Flash Player in Net gt Adobe Flash Player in NetFront on page 408 Front NET SNMP The BSD License gt The BSD License on page 410 MSTLIB gt MSTLIB on page 416 servlet jar Java Servlet Implementation Classes Version 2 1 1 Binary Code License gt Java Servlet Implementation Classes Version 2 1 1 Binary Code License on page 418 If you need source code for the following software send your request by email in English or Japanese to lt oipossg canon co jp gt The request must identify the software name and applicable license See the table of software and respective license terms below for more detail and correspond ing license conditions Chapter 13 Third p
179. edia The selected media will be the default media The glass plate is the location where you usually place originals that the automatic docu ment feeder cannot handle The glass plate cannot detect the dimensions of your original When you copy from the glass plate you must always define the size of your original How to copy non standard size originals aA Bh WwW N nN Place the originals face up into the ADF or place 1 original face down on the glass plate Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Copy job In the Original section touch Size Use the and buttons to enter the correct media size Press OK The Size button displays the defined size In the Output section touch Media Select a media from the list and touch OK The setting Zoom determines how the copy will look When Zoom gt Fit to page is enabled the original will be scaled to fit the media size of the output When Zoom gt Fit to page is disabled you can enter a custom zoom percentage Chapter 7 Copy jobs 209 Scan now and print later postponed copying Scan now and print later postponed copying Introduction You can scan an original document now and print the document later This is called postponed copying To use this function you must send a copy job to the list of Waiting jobs When to do You must only change the destination to Waiting jobs when the default destination o
180. ediately after the 2 Auto gradation adjustment procedure is finished The Media family calibration procedure is part of the complete calibration procedure m When a new media family is defined with the Settings Editor Before you begin In case a new media family becomes available 1 Touch System gt Color management 2 Touch 3 Media family calibration and touch Start A status window opens Calibrate the controller 3 Media family calibration 1 At Media family select which media family you want to calibrate m Coated 366 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Calibrate the controller 3 Media family calibration Uncoated Customer defined 2 At Halftone select which halftone you want to calibrate Normal Fine Error diffusion 3 At Media select which media you want to calibrate 4 Touch OK to print the calibration chart An instruction window opens 5 Follow the instructions carefully and touch Next A few calibration charts are printed Make sure you use the last printed calibration chart An instruction window opens 6 Calibrate the spectrometer according to the instructions on the operator panel m Place the spectrometer in the holder press the button to calibrate the spectrometer and wait for 5 seconds m Take 5 blank sheets of the same media you used for the calibration chart and put them underneath the last printed calibration chart
181. eet Top right Center left moves the image to centre of the left side of the sheet Center left Center moves the image to the centre of the sheet A F Center Center right moves the image to the centre of the gt right side of the sheet A Center right Bottom left moves the image to the lower left corner te of the sheet A Bottom left Chapter 8 Scan jobs 223 Description of the scan job settings Setting Values Bottom cen ter Bottom right File settings Margin erase Setting Values Shift Image shift 224 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Description Bottom center moves the image to the centre of the bottom side of the sheet Bottom right moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet Description Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin By default the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical Widening the margin can be useful if you want to staple or punch the output for example Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do not need additional space for stapling or punching the output for example If you want to define a different value for each side press 1 The icon changes to the unlocked status Now you can define the values for the front side and the back side separately
182. ement is governed by the laws of the State of New York and the intellectual property laws of the United States of America No party to this Agreement will bring a legal action under this Agreement more than one year after the cause of action arose Each party waives its rights to a jury trial in any resulting litigation Chapter 13 Third party software COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 THE ACCOMPANYING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE AGREEMENT ANY USE REPRODUC TION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM CONSTITUTES RECIPIENT S ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT 1 DEFINITIONS Contribution means a in the case of the initial Contributor the initial code and documentation distributed under this Agreement and b in the case of each subsequent Contributor i changes to the Program and ii additions to the Program where such changes and or additions to the Program originate from and are distributed by that particular Contributor A Contribution originates from a Contributor if it was added to the Program by such Contributor itself or anyone acting on such Contributor s behalf Contributions do not include additions to the Program which i are separate modules of software distributed in conjunction with the Program under their own license agreement and ii are not derivative works of the Program Contributor means any person or entity that distributes t
183. en in pencil perform the feeder cleaning procedure m Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the feeder Chapter 7 Copy jobs Feeding originals into the ADF Orientation 1 299 Vertical placement 300 Horizontal placement 1 Place the original face up 1 Place the original face up NOTE m A4 A5 Bs LTR and STMT originals can be placed either vertically or horizon tally However the scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that of vertically placed originals Horizontally placed A4 As B5 LTR and STMR originals are referred to as A4R AsR BsR LTRR and STMTR m A3 B4 11 x 17 and LGL originals must be placed horizontally Feeding originals to the ADF 1 Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your originals 2 Neatly place your originals with the side to be copied face up into the original supply tray Chapter 7 Copy jobs 195 Feeding originals into the ADF Place your originals as far into the feeder as they will go until the Original Set indicator is lit 302 Original Set indicator 1 O IMPORTANT m Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned m When scanning is complete remove the ori
184. er terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modifi cation of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include Chapter 13 Third party software GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things m a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is under stood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions m b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a
185. ereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without re striction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHER WISE ARISING FROM OUT OF ORIN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Chapter 13 Third party software fontconfig fontconfig Copyright 2001 2003 Keith Packard Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Keith Packard not be used in adver
186. ered by the Licensed Patents The patent license shall not apply to any other combinations which include the Contribution No hardware per se is licensed hereunder c Recipient understands that although each Contributor grants the licenses to its Contri butions set forth herein no assurances are provided by any Contributor that the Program does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entity Each Contributor disclaims any liability to Recipient for claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise As a condition to exer cising the rights and licenses granted hereunder each Recipient hereby assumes sole re sponsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed if any For example if a third party patent license is required to allow Recipient to distribute the Program it is Recipient s responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Program d Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution if any to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement 3 REQUIREMENTS A Contributor may choose to distribute the Program in object code form under its own license agreement provided that a it complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and b its license agreement i effectively disclaims on behalf of all Contributors all warranties and conditions
187. ered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy
188. eriod of time after becoming aware of such noncompliance Ifall Recipient s rights under this Agreement terminate Recipient agrees to cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable However Recipient s obligations under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall con tinue and survive Chapter 13 Third party software COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute copies of this Agreement but in order to avoid inconsistency the Agreement is copyrighted and may only be modified in the fol lowing manner The Agreement Steward reserves the right to publish new versions in cluding revisions of this Agreement from time to time No one other than the Agreement Steward has the right to modify this Agreement IBM is the initial Agreement Steward IBM may assign the responsibility to serve as the Agreement Steward to a suitable separate entity Each new version of the Agreement will be given a distinguishing version number The Program including Contributions may always be distributed subject to the version of the Agreement under which it was received In addition after a new version of the Agreement is published Contributor may elect to distribute the Program including its Contributions under the new version Except as expressly stated in Sections 2 a and 2 b above Recipient receives no rights or licenses to the intellectual property of any
189. escription of the print job settings Setting Values Description SY Bottom cen Output settings Shift Setting Shift Values Margin shift Image shift Bottom center moves the image to the centre of the bottom side of the sheet Bottom right moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet Description Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin By default the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical Widening the margin can be useful if you want to staple or punch the output for example Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do not need additional space for stapling or punching the output for example If you want to define a different value for each side press The icon changes to the unlocked status Now you can define the values for the front side and the back side separately Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or ver tically By default the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical If you want to define a different value for each side press The icon changes to the unlocked status Now you can define the values for the front side and the back side separately Chapter 6 Print jobs 109 Description of the print job sett
190. esult in personal injury Be aware that the light emitted from the glass plate may be very bright when closing the feeder IMPORTANT If you are placing the original onto the glass plate the size of the original is detected after the feeder is closed Be sure to close the feeder before copying Chapter 7 Copy jobs 199 Put originals on the glass plate NOTE Remove the original from the glass plate when scanning is complete 200 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Make a copy Copy your documents Make a copy Introduction A basic copy is a copy for which you only define a few settings before touching the Start button such as 1 sided or 2 sided A staple The number of copies required Before you begin Remove staples or paper clips Make sure that the originals in the automatic document feeder have the same size Make sure that the automatic document feeder does not contain more than 100 sheets 80 g m or 20 lb bond Make sure that the originals are not curled How to make a basic copy ava pw LY m Place the originals face up into the ADF or place 1 original face down on the glass plate Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Copy job If required define the settings and the required number of copies Select Scheduled jobs in the Destination field to start copying immediately Press The job is added to the list of Scheduled jobs Chapter
191. ets 80 g m 20 lb bond Chapter 12 Specifications 381 Specifications Specification Value Paper sizes 13 x19 330 x 483 mm 12 5 8 x 17 11 16 320 x 450 mm SRA3 12 x 18 305 x 457 mm 11 x17 279 4 X 431 8 mm A3 A4 A4R B4 B5 LGL LTR LTRR EXEC STMTR Envelopes ISO B5 ISO Cs5 DL Com1o No 10 Monarch Nagagata 3 Yougatanaga 3 Kakugata 2 Custom sizes 100 x 148 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 3 94 x 5 83 to 13 x 19 20 Paper weight 52 300 g m 14 lb bond 110 lb cover Scan to file optional Specification Value Description Option to resale license enabling scan to file functionality Features Direct embedding of sRGB or Adobe RGB color profiles for PDF scan scan while warm up standard and user defined scan and copy templates Resolution selectable 150 dpi 300 dpi 600 dpi for scan to file Scan speed with auto 45 ipm 1 sided 44 ipm 2 sided matic document feeder Scan to Email Scan to FTP Scan to PRISMAaccess Scan to USB Single Multi page TIFF JPEG PDF Notes Initial scan resolution is always 600 dpi If the operator se lected a lower resolution setting for scan to file the initial scan is processed accordingly before outputting the file to the selected output location FTP or email Finisher Staple Finisher A1 Specification Value Optional finisher for offset stacking and stapling Maximum stapling ca A4 LTR up to 100 sheets 80 g m
192. ettings access through the operator panel 318 Introduction to the Setup SECtION ccccsssceesceeeeeceeeeeeeeessseeeseees 318 Work with the workflow profileS ccccccccccccccceceeeeseessseessssenesseneees 320 Change the warning time cccccscccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 324 Disable the warning timme eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeae 325 Truncate the job NAMEC cccssseesesssssssseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeesssseeseeed 326 Adjust the brightness and contrast of the operator panel 327 Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel 328 Automated workflows access through the Settings Editor 331 Introduction to automated WOFkfIOWS cccccccccceceeceeeeeseesssseeseees 331 Add an automated WoOrkFflow cccccccssccseeeeeeseeeeeeessseesssseesssenened 333 Edit an automated WOrkflOW ccccccccceeseeesseeessesnsssseanseeeeeeeeeneess 334 Delete an automated WOrkflOW c sscsssssccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 335 Restore the factory default WOrkflOW ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 336 FOTO GIS voce ceviteceecctsavanmanmeed E ides cetenwadaudavedeveed redactad 337 Introduction tO NOTFOICETS cccccceeeecesssseesssencnneeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeess 337 Activate the hotfolder fUNCtiON cccscccecseceeceeeeeeeessssesssssessseneaes 338 Create a Wottold triies cccvscoosearesdercans
193. ettings you can define for the copy Job The Job pane shows the generic settings you can define for the whole job Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output Furthermore this pane gives access to the templates Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can carry out Chapter 7 Copy jobs 173 Description of the copy job settings Original settings 1 or 2 sided Setting Values Description 1 or 2 sid The automatically set value for this setting ed Only the front side contains an image or text Both the front side and the back side contain an image or text 174 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Original settings Original type Setting Description Original The automatically set value for this setting type The original has a vertical format height gt width The binding edge is at the left hand side When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the Portrait left image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form The binding edge of the original is at the top When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable The original has a vertical format height gt width Portrait top form The original has a horizontal format width gt Cam height The binding edge of the original is at the le
194. f copy jobs is Scheduled jobs The default destination of copy jobs is defined in the workflow profiles How to use postponed copying nN 1 Put the originals face up and in readable form into the automatic document feeder 2 Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Copy job 3 4 5 Define the settings for your copy job Touch Destination to select Waiting jobs Ifrequired touch Job name to rename the job This helps you to recognize the job more easily Touch Start The job is sent to the selected destination There you can select and print the job later 210 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Finish the output Finish the output How to punch or staple the output 1 Place the originals face up into the ADF or place 1 original face down on the glass plate Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Copy job At the Binding setting select the required number of staples and the location of the staples At the Punching setting select the required number of holes At the Folding setting select the folding method At the Trimming setting define the trim settings If required define the other settings for the original document and the output Enter the generic values in the Job section Touch Start w yN oN Aane Chapter 7 Copy jobs 211 Adjust the image to improve the copy and scan quality Adjust the image to improve the copy and scan
195. f it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part con tains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License Chapter 13 Third party software GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may re distribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception ifthe Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an an nouncement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this
196. f the job You can only make a proof for a job in the list of Waiting jobs When you make a proof the printed set is not subtracted from the defined total number of sets for a job For example if you need 10 sets the printer will still print 10 sets after you made the proof This is different from the checking of the first set Locations of the Proof button The Proof button is available at the following locations m List of Waiting jobs NOTE To make a proof of a job in the list of Printed jobs you must first touch Copy to copy the job to the list of Waiting jobs There you can select the job and touch Proof Make a proof 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues 2 If collapsed first touch to expand the desired list of Waiting jobs 3 Touch the job of which you want to print a proof NOTE You can select multiple jobs 4 Press Proof A copy of the job goes to the bottom of the list of Scheduled jobs The original job re mains in the list of Waiting jobs You can recognize a proof by the magnifying glass on the job icon 9 mReprint a job on page 122 Chapter 6 Print jobs 125 Stop the printer Stop the printer Introduction The printer can be stopped in 2 ways a Manually Use the Stop button or the Stop after job button to stop the printer a Automatically Define a corresponding setting in the workflow profiles Stop the printer manually Manual
197. f the same media you used for the calibration chart and put them underneath the calibration chart 5 Measure the calibration sheet according to the instructions on the operator panel Perform the following actions per color m Position the spectrometer at the indicated position Hold down the spectrometer button and wait for the arrow m Scan the column with patches smoothly in about 2 seconds 6 Touch OK to save the shading correction results and continue with the 2 Auto gradation adjustment procedure Result NOTE In exceptional cases the 1 Shading correction procedure fails with a Density out of range message In that case you can first perform the 2 Auto gradation adjustment procedure before the 1 Shading correction procedure If the 1 Shading correction procedure still fails contact your local service representative wCalibrate the printer 2 Auto gradation adjustment on page 364 wCalibrate the controller 3 Media family calibration on page 366 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 363 Calibrate the printer 2 Auto gradation adjustment Calibrate the printer 2 Auto gradation adjustment Introduction The 2 Auto gradation adjustment procedure is a precise calibration of the gradation density and color settings of the printer A test print is used to scan and to correct the ir regularities automatically The auto gradation adjustment is part of th
198. from cas Feeding from cas sette or deck sette or deck Color B amp W Uncoated 5 0 65 0 65 0 52 105 g m an 14 28 lb bond 46 0148 9 46 0148 9 io al alll al sa e e e 372 Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications 1 sided 2 sided Feeding from cas Feeding from cas sette or deck sette or deck Color E B amp W Color Uncoated 106 220 g m 29 lb bond 82 lb cover Uncoated 221 300 g m r 83 110 lb cover AaR LTRR ane ae Only via POD deck Ee C lite Multi drawer deck Coated 21 6 Quality mode a 106 300 g m A4R LTRR ales ahea issie asal 28 lb bond 110 lb ii cover Only via POD deck lite Multi drawer deck 2 sided supports up to 220 g m 82 lb bond Coated Productivity mode 106 180 g m cover ae 2 16 2 16 2 16 2 Only via POD deck 11x17 neMasame a foe fie fe se Chapter 12 Specifications 373 Specifications 1 sided 2 sided Feeding from cas Feeding from cas sette or deck sette or deck Coated Productivity mode 181 300 g m 67 lb bond 110 lb cover Only via POD deck lite Multi drawer deck 2 sided supports up to 220 g m 82 lb bond FPOT Copy speed with automatic document feeder DAF D427 8 seconds First set 45 ipm simplex 44 ipm duplex Following sets output at full engine speed FCOT 15 seconds from glass plate General Specification
199. ft hand side When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable Landscape left form The original has a horizontal format width gt ha height The binding edge of the original is at the top When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the top image or text on the back side of the sheet is in Landscape readable form Chapter 7 Copy jobs 175 Description of the copy job settings Original settings Size Setting Values Description Size Original in the ADF or on the glass plate m Automatic size detection or m Enter the media format of the original A4 A3 Let When your original has a non standard size you ter Ledger can use the and buttons to enter the exact etc measures You can enter the measures in steps of 1 mm 0 01 inches The text of the Size button changes into Custom Automatic orientation detection or Indicate the orientation of nonstandard size media Portrait Ly Landscape Original settings Background suppression You can use the Background suppression to print a uniform background For example to suppress unwanted spots 176 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Output settings 1 or 2 sided Setting Values 1 or 2 sid ed M Description The automatically set value for this setting The output contains an
200. ftone combination for which you want to adjust the CMYK curve The current CMYK curves are displayed Press Edit Select the area you want to adjust m Highlights default Midtones a Shadows Touch the link unlink button to link or unlink the CMYK values Use link to shift all sliders at the same time Use unlink to shift each slider Use the sliders to change the CMYK curve for the selected area 9 Repeat step 6 to 9 for the next area 10 11 12 Repeat step 4 to 9 for another media family halftone combination Touch OK to save the values set Press Close 368 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Specifications Technology Specification Value Imaging technology Electrophotography Toner pQ Toner no fusing oil Color gradations 256 per color Maximum imageable 323 x 476 6 mm 12 72 x 18 76 area Features Real time automatic color calibration on the fly toner and paper refill automatic duplexing up to 220 g m 80 lb cover Option Operator warning light with warn ahead function ality warning time adjustable Print speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO Specification 1 sided 2 sided Feeding from cas Feeding from cas sette or deck sette or deck Weight Size Color B amp W Color B amp W 5 0 Uncoated A4 70 0 7 70 0 52 105 g m LTR 14 28 b bond A4R LTRR 49 5 52 6 53 0 56 4 53 0 56 4 A3 35 0 37
201. g area Scans documents sent from the feeder Glass plate Use the glass plate when scanning books thick originals thin originals transparencies and so on Inner cover Open this cover when cleaning the document feed scanning area ADF handle The ADF handle helps you close the feeder Chapter 2 Main parts The automatic document feeder ADF mOverview of the machine configuration on page 16 mFeeding originals into the ADF on page 194 mPut originals on the glass plate on page 197 Chapter 2 Main parts 25 The operator panel The operator panel Introduction The operator panel helps you to carry out print jobs copy jobs and scan jobs This section describes the main components of the operator panel IMPORTANT You can clean the screen of the operator panel with a 50 mix of water and isopropyl alcohol K2 Use a lint free cloth Always put the cleaner onto the cloth and not di rectly on the screen Illustration 14 The operator panel The components of the operator panel The components of the operator panel Component Function Depending on whether the printer is currently active or in the sleep mode m Put the machine into the sleep mode or m Wake up the machine from the sleep mode a Shut down the printer and controller Sleep mode key Stop the printer a After a set or m As soon as possible 26 Chapter 2 Main parts The operator pa
202. g edge Stacker stapler lower z Media 44 Top Mail 60 IV Offset stacked Binding 1 Staple top right J Separator sheet Punch hole No punch holes No punch holes z 149 The finishing options in the printer driver Click the white question mark to open the online help of the printer driver for detailed information Chapter 3 Operating concept 79 Manage production printing Manage production printing Introduction The operating panel of the printer enables you to manage production printing You manage all print jobs from the Schedule tab The Remote Monitor enables you to monitor the system status from a distance via an internet browser Manage production printing 1 Press the Schedule button at the lower left of the operator panel to access the Schedule view Printing Jobnr 1 Required media Normal A4 A4 D 80 gin white Normal A4 A4 D 80 aim Blue 5 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 4hours 8 hours Required output locations X Stacker stapler upper tray D Schedule Jobs Trays a System 150 The Schedule view Monitor operator intervention remotely 1 Open the Internet Browser 2 At the address bar enter http printername remoteinfo 80 Chapter 3 Operating concept Manage production printing The Remote Monitor displays a fixed time line of 30 minutes Remote Mon
203. ge the finishing Method cceeseecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeees 168 Chapter 7 CODY JODS reccccececceceees scans cissaceseeeeeeseted sececetcctais obec cactus ence xtassesoececeeteeeesttecetecass 169 General INTOPMAU ON i esses sveccewsdestddvcasenceddaivetocnsiees dads secedadiauadoaveluindedccddessd 170 Introduction to the copy FUNCTION ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 170 Description of the copy job SettiNgS ce ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 172 Feeding originals into the ADF ccccceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 194 Put originals on the glass Plate cccccssscccccececeeeeeeeeeesssesssseeseees 197 COPY your COCUMENMS cccccceceeeeeeeesceeeseeeseeeeseueeeeauseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 201 Make amp CODY cceceeeececeeeeeeeeeeee cette eeaaeee eaaa a aeaaaee 201 Combine subsets into 1 COCUMENT ccssscesseeeseeesssnseeenteeeeeeees 202 Access other functions during a copy job or scan job 066 203 THE ZOOM DEN AVIOM vies csiccccsesevsnsuisaatedecsesacdsannes stats oiiaaie inia 204 Create and use custom copy templates ceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 207 Rename a COPY JOD ccccccccccceceeeeesceesseeseseecssenneauseeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeess 208 Copy non standard size OFiGinals ccccccceeseeesseseessenssssneeaneeeeneeees 209 Scan now and print later postponed COPYIN cccsccccceeceeeeeeees 210 Finish the OUtPUL
204. ginals from the original output area to avoid paper jams 303 Original output area 1 NOTE m When enlarging an A4 B5 LTR STMT original onto A3 B4 11 X 17 LGL paper place the original horizontally m The scanned originals are output to the original output area in the order they are fed into the feeder 196 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Put originals on the glass plate Put originals on the glass plate Introduction Use the glass plate when copying bound originals such as books and magazines heavy or lightweight originals and transparencies Also place originals onto the glass plate when you want to copy an A3 11 x 17 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off The size of the original is auto matically detected and the document is scanned The printer cannot always detect the size of the original if it is nonstandard paper size such as a book In this case specify the size at which you want to scan the original NOTE The printer automatically detects the size of the following originals m A3 B4 A4 A4R Bs A5 B5R and B6 m 11 x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT and STMTR Orientation i l e a EY LET J LE 304 Vertical placement 305 Horizontal pla
205. h other and require individual settings m You want to combine different documents into one file Different subsets are subsets that have a mix of 1 sided and 2 sided pages or require dif ferent exposure settings for example When you scan these types of documents you must define the settings for each subset individually This section describes the following m Combine subsets into one file Furthermore this sections describes the actions you can carry out from the preview pane Add a subset Insert a subset Delete a subset Edit a subset Before you begin 1 Divide your document into subsets 2 Put the first subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate i Note When you use the automatic document feeder the size of the originals must be one of the supported standard sizes 3 If necessary adjust the original guides of the automatic document feeder Combine subsets into one file 1 On the operator panel press the Copy Scan button 2 Select a scan profile Chapter 8 Scan jobs 229 Combine subsets into one file aw The job window opens Press Subsets Define the settings for the first subset original and file NOTE Some settings that you define for the first subset apply to the whole job the Type and Resolution settings for example These settings are fixed and are grayed out after scanning the first subset Touch the Start button Put the
206. hapter 2 Main parts Chapter 3 Operating concept Operating concept Operating concept Introduction To maximize efficient and productive printing the operating concept of the system is based on the following principles Document preparation job submission and production printing are clearly separated steps in the workflow Media definition is done by choosing from a media catalog instead of selecting trays Operation is intuitive and convenient at all workflow steps The workflow is entirely integrated because all components work together seamlessly 60 Chapter 3 Operating concept Operating concept Illustration 134 The components of the complete system Chapter 3 Operating concept 61 Operating concept Components overview Component Main task 62 1 Settings Editor Define initial and default system settings m Set default print and workflow settings m Define default color management settings like color pre sets Maintain the media catalog m Set scan settings Printer driver Available via any appli cation e g Adobe Acro bat Microsoft Word Document preparation and job submission Document preparation for production printing m Define settings per print job m Send print jobs to the printer PRISMAprepare Optional software Document preparation and job submission Document preparation with full preview for producti
207. he JPI In the event that Licensee creates any Java related API and distribute such API to others for applet or application development you must promptly publish broadly an accurate specification for such API for free use by all developers of Java based software 2 Restrictions Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to all copies is retained by Sun and or its licensors Licensee shall not modify decompile dis assemble decrypt extract or otherwise reverse engineer Software Software may not be leased assigned or sublicensed in whole or in part Software is not designed or intended for use in on line control of aircraft air traffic aircraft navigation or aircraft communica tions or in the design construction operation or maintenance of any nuclear facility Licensee warrants that it will not use or redistribute the Software for such purposes 3 Disclaimer of Warranty Software is provided AS IS without a warranty of any kind ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUD ING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED 4 Termination This License is effective until terminated Licensee may terminate this License at any time by destroying all copies of Software This License will terminate im mediately without notice from Sun if Licensee fails to comply with any provision of this License Upon such termination Lice
208. he Program Licensed Patents mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the use or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program Program means the Contributions distributed in accordance with this Agreement Recipient means anyone who receives the Program under this Agreement including all Contributors 2 GRANT OF RIGHTS a Subject to the terms of this Agreement each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non exclusive worldwide royalty free copyright license to reproduce prepare derivative works of publicly display publicly perform distribute and sublicense the Contribution of such Contributor if any and such derivative works in source code and object code form Chapter 13 Third party software 441 COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 b Subject to the terms of this Agreement each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under Licensed Patents to make use sell offer to sell import and otherwise transfer the Contribution of such Contributor if any in source code and object code form This patent license shall apply to the combi nation of the Contribution and the Program if at the time the Contribution is added by the Contributor such addition of the Contribution causes such combination to be covered by the Licensed Patents The patent license shall not apply to any other combinations which include the C
209. he bulk paper module O IMPORTANT m Ifyou fasten the blue screws without pressing the outer size change plate toward you the plate may be fixed at an angle m Ifyou use the paper deck with a tilted outer size change plate paper may feed slanted poor print quality may result and paper jams may occur Therefore make sure to fasten the blue screw while pressing the outer size change plate towards you O IMPORTANT m Ifthe rear edge retainer is not aligned properly paper may become jammed the quality of the image may be degraded or the inside of the main unit may become dirty m Make sure to load paper with the rear edge retainer properly aligned with the paper size marks on the top and base of the pod deck lite 10 Fix the rear edge retainer with the blue screw using a coin or something similar m Fix the screws by turning them clockwise 266 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module 11 12 IMPORTANT There are two screw holes for fastening the rear edge retainer Make sure that it is fastened properly aligned with the marks for the desired paper size to prevent it from being installed at an angle Remove the two blue screws on the inner size change plate using a coin or something similar NOTE Hot air blown by the fan may warm the inner size change plate Chapter 9 Paper toner and sta
210. he settings of the active print job amp after you stopped the printer press the Stop button two times Touch Properties or touch the job two times to open the Properties window Touch the Binding edge button Touch the desired value Press OK Press OK NAN Bw 160 Chapter 6 Print jobs Select a different media for a job Select a different media for a job Introduction If you want to print a job on other media than originally defined for that job you can select a different media via the operator panel Requirements regarding the new media m The media must be available in the Media catalog m The media must have the same size as the original media How to select another media for a job 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job you want to change NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job amp after you stopped the printer press the Stop button two times Touch Properties or touch the job two times to open the Properties window 4 In the preview pane at the right hand side touch the media you want to change When more than 1 media was defined for a job the preview pane displays a separate button for each media W From the list select the new media Press OK 7 Press OK Aan Chapter 6 Print jobs 161 Change the settings for covers Change the settings for covers Introduction When front co
211. he wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that Chapter 13 Third party software 427 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 428 uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFI CATION o This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be dis tributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distribut ed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included wit
212. hing method Change the finishing method Introduction The required finishing method is usually set in the printer driver However you can change the finishing method on the operator panel Depending on the configuration of your system you can change the following finishing methods for example a Number of staples m Number of punch holes m The location of the staples or punch holes How to change the finishing method 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job you want to change NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job amp after you stopped the printer press the Stop button two times Touch Properties or touch the job two times to open the Properties window Touch the Binding button Make the required changes Press OK Press OK Nan fw 168 Chapter 6 Print jobs Chapter 7 Copy jobs Introduction to the copy function General information Introduction to the copy function Introduction The copy function enables you to copy paper originals You can define the settings of the copy jobs manually or by using templates Templates contain predefined settings for re curring types of copy jobs The copy function contains a number of factory default templates for example for copying mixed size originals or combining several sets of originals Furthermore you can define customized templates The factory default templates are directly availabl
213. hout limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Lib
214. ht Upper Right Upper Left A ower Left amp Lower Right Double Staple Area Right Side Left Side A CAUTION Do not place your hands in the part of the tray where stapling takes place near the rollers in a finisher as this may result in personal injury 38 Chapter 2 Main parts Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit IMPORTANT During stapling the output trays move downward as the outputted stack of paper increases in quantity and thickness Once an output tray has reached its stacking limit 100 sets of prints have been output or the predefined height has been reached printing and stapling temporarily stop Remove all of the stapled prints from the output tray and printing and stapling resume You can corner and double staple A3 B4 A4 A4R and Bs 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR and EXEC You cannot staple tracing paper transparencies labels or envelopes Do not pull copies or prints out of the output area while they are being stapled Remove the copies or prints after they are output to one of the output trays NOTE Staple G1 is standard equipment on Staple Finisher A1 Staple G1 and Staple P1 are standard equipment on Booklet Finisher A1 If you want to use Staple mode with more than 50 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond of A3 B4 A4R 11 x 17 LGL or LTRR paper or 100 sheets 80 g m 20 lb bond of A4 B5
215. ia The operator panel displays the temporary media in the following places m In the list of Required media in the Schedule view when the job is scheduled for printing m In the list of Temporary media in the Media tab of the System view When you plan to use a temporary media more often you can add the media to the Media catalog This section describes how to add temporary media to the Media catalog Add temporary media to the Media catalog 1 On the operator panel press the System button 2 Press Media The names of the temporary media are displayed in the Temporary media section 3 Select the media you want to add to the Media catalog 4 Press To catalog The media is added to the Media catalog NOTE m If required you can edit the attributes of the media in the Media catalog that is part of the Settings Editor m The temporary media uses the color settings and calibration values of the default media family 148 Chapter 6 Print jobs Perform a media registration Perform a media registration Introduction The different properties of media can influence the alignment of images on the media To ensure a correct alignment you can perform a media registration for each individual media in the Media catalog Required tool Ruler Illustration Pea ra 230 Media registration chart Perform a media registration 1 Touch
216. ically made after you load the correct paper If you select another paper source the remaining prints are made after you press OK If you want to change the paper loaded in the paper deck from plain to coated wait for the warm air fan to readjust the temperature before you change the paper Load the media into the bulk paper modules The inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position 2 Open a package of paper and remove the paper stack 258 A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper IMPORTANT Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the bulk paper modules NOTE m For high quality printouts use paper recommended by your authorized dealer Before loading paper always fan the sheets several times and align the edges to facilitate feeding Ep ai 3 Lift the feeding support roller If Paper Deck Unit A1 is attached proceed to step 4 5 O IMPORTANT m When loading paper be sure to first lift the feeding support roller If you load paper without raising the feeding support roller it may become detached and paper may not be fed properly m Using the paper deck with the feeding support roller detached may cause paper jams 4 Load the paper s
217. ich 1 sided or 2 sided printing was defined will be printed on either 1 side or both sides of a sheet If required you can change this setting How to change 2 sided into 1 sided and vice versa 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job of which you want to change the number of sets NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job amp after you have stopped the printer press the Stop button two times Touch Properties or touch the job 2x to open the Properties window Touch the 1 or 2 sided button Touch the desired value Press OK Press OK Nav fy Chapter 6 Print jobs 159 Change the binding edge Change the binding edge Introduction The binding edge determines whether the binding position is along the long edge or the short edge of the media The binding edge is usually set via the printer driver for example However you can view and change the binding edge via the operator panel The binding edge has a relation with the direction of the margin shift orientation and staple position NOTE When the binding edge is changed for 2 sided printing the image orientation is automatically adjusted to get the correct layout The orientation of the image on the back side of the page will be changed too How to change the binding edge 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job you want to change NOTE You can only change t
218. igations under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall con tinue and survive Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute copies of this Agreement but in order to avoid inconsistency the Agreement is copyrighted and may only be modified in the fol lowing manner The Agreement Steward reserves the right to publish new versions in cluding revisions of this Agreement from time to time No one other than the Agreement Steward has the right to modify this Agreement The Eclipse Foundation is the initial Agreement Steward The Eclipse Foundation may assign the responsibility to serve as the Agreement Steward to a suitable separate entity Each new version of the Agreement will be given a distinguishing version number The Program including Contributions may Chapter 13 Third party software 439 Eclipse Public License v 1 0 440 always be distributed subject to the version of the Agreement under which it was received In addition after a new version of the Agreement is published Contributor may elect to distribute the Program including its Contributions under the new version Except as expressly stated in Sections 2 a and 2 b above Recipient receives no rights or licenses to the intellectual property of any Contributor under this Agreement whether expressly by implication estoppel or otherwise All rights in the Program not expressly granted under this Agreement are reserved This Agre
219. image on 1 side The output contains an image on both sides Chapter 7 Copy jobs 177 Description of the copy job settings Output settings Binding edge Setting Values Description Binding The automatically set value for this setting edge lV Auto The output has a vertical format height gt width The binding edge is at the left hand side When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form Portrait left The output has a vertical format height gt width The binding edge of the print is at the top When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form This means that every back of a 2 sided print is upside down compared to the front Portrait top The output has a horizontal format width gt height The binding edge of the print is on the left side EE Landscape When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the left text or image is in readable form m The output has a horizontal format width gt k height m The binding edge of the print is at the top Landscape m When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the top image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form This means that every back of a 2 sided print is upside down compared to the front 178 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings
220. ince last refill Open the magenta toner cover Toner Yellow loner cover a Waste toner Replace the waste toner container mlntroduction to the Maintenance section on page 344 mlntroduction to the Setup section on page 318 mlntroduction to the Media section on page 144 Chapter 4 Operator panel views 91 The System view 92 Chapter 4 Operator panel views Chapter 5 Power information The power buttons and power modes The power buttons and power modes The power buttons The printer has the following switches and buttons to control the power supply Power switch The power switch is located on the upper right side of the printer The power switch connects and disconnects the printer to and from the main power m Sleep button with LED i The Sleep button is located at the right hand side of the operator panel The Sleep button on the printer allows you to switch between the Ready mode and the Sleep mode This is only possible if the power switch is in the I position and the startup phase is completed The power modes The power modes Power mode Sleep button Operator pan el Off Off Off 94 Chapter 5 Power information The printer is completely off The power switch is in the Description position There is no power consumption The printer can not receive or print jobs The
221. incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose dis tribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promot ing the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IM PLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM Chapter 13 Third party software 423 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 424 IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
222. ings Output settings Print delivery Setting Values Description Print deliv Outputloca Select the output location for the job Depending on ery tion the settings for your print job the machine automati cally suggests the preferred output location for your job However you can manually overrule this sugges tion m Stacker stapler upper tray Deliver the prints at the upper tray of the stack er stapler m Stacker stapler lower tray Deliver the prints at the lower tray of the stack er stapler m Stacker stapler booklet tray Deliver the prints at the booklet tray of the stack er stapler m Folder main tray Deliver the folded prints to the tray at the bottom of the folder Sort ahh By page The output is sorted by page The output is sorted by set Offset stack This setting is only available when the Offset stacking ing setting is set to Sets as in job in the workflow pro file On Each set delivered to an output location will have a small shift on top of the previous set This makes it easier to recognize individual sets Off All the sets or jobs that get to an output location are stacked in a straight stack 110 Chapter 6 Print jobs Description of the print job settings Setting Values Advanced settings gt Sheet order Advanced settings gt Sheet orien tation Description p
223. ings Editor m Optional Adobe Asian fonts Japanese 5 Morisawa fonts no Heisei fonts Chinese 2 fonts for Simplified Chinese 1 font for Traditional Chinese Korean 1 font for Korean Spot color libraries HKS K HKS K 3000 HKS N HKS N 3000 PAN TONE Goe un coated Pantone solid un coated Printer drivers Windows Vista Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Mac OS X 10 4 10 5 10 6 32 bit PPD Functions Media selection layout selection page program ming including tab shift and tab captions selection of sub sets mixed duplex simplex printing of sub sets margin shift image quality and color settings color presets template definition watermarks Security E shredding HTTPS SNMP v3 Password protection per user role key operator system administrator service technician Accessories Standard license m Scanning B1 m Scheduler A1 a Multiple queues Hot folders A1 m E shredding B1 Optional license m Remote Viewer B1 m Asian font sets Korean B1 Japanese B1 Simplified Chinese B1 Traditional Chinese B1 Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Paper handling Specification Paper Input Standard 4 paper trays and bypass tray Options Single tray paper input modules POD Deck Lite A1 Paper Deck Unit A1 Multi tray paper input module Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Maximum paper capac 9300 sheets ity Paper feed technology Friction feed
224. into the USB port at the left hand side of the operator panel Touch Jobs gt USB Touch gt to browse through the directories on the USB drive Touch the file or files you want to print or touch Select to select multiple files Touch Print to send the file to the list of Scheduled jobs immediately or an A Ww N m Touch Save to save a copy of the file to another location on your printer such as the list of Waiting jobs Then you can edit the file first and print the file from the other location The locations you can select depend on your system configuration 132 Chapter 6 Print jobs Introduction to the Schedule view Media handling Introduction to the Schedule view Introduction The Schedule is your daily planning board for print jobs The Schedule helps you to keep the machine running This section shows and describes the main parts of the Schedule NOTE The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are only valid for document printing For streaming jobs amp all the bars remain grey until the paper trays are empty or the output locations are full Then the machine stops and the bars become red Furthermore the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets Chapter 6 Print jobs 133 Introduction to the Schedule view The Schedule view Normal A4
225. ion of this software and or software modules are subject to copyrights a and b below a Copyright 1999 2000 2002 Aladdin Enterprises All rights reserved b Copyright Unpublished Work of Novell Inc All Rights Reserved 10 Chapter 1 Preface Notes for the reader Notes for the reader Introduction This manual helps you to use the imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO C9065 PRO The manual contains a description of the product and guidelines to use and operate the imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO C9065 PRO Definition Attention Getters Parts of this manual require your special attention These parts can provide the following m Additional general information for example information that is useful when you perform a task m Information to prevent personal injuries or property damage Symbols used in this manual The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures restrictions handling precautions and instructions that should be observed for safety Overview of the attention getters Indicates Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly To use the machine safely always pay attention to these warnings CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly To use the machine safely always pay attention to these cautions IMPORTANT Indicates o
226. ions Software including technical data is subject to U S export control laws including the U S export Administration Act and its associated regulations and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries You agree to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export re export or import Software Software may not be downloaded or otherwise exported or re exported i into or to a national or resident of Cuba Iraq Iran North Korea Libya Sudan Syria or any country to which the U S has embargoed goods or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nations or the U S Commerce Department s Table of Denial Orders c Restriction Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252 227 7013 c 1 ii and FAR 52 227 19 c 2 as appli cable Chapter 13 Third party software 405 libpng libpng If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence libpng versions 1 0 7 July 1 2000 through 1 2 5 October 3 2002 are Copyright c 2000 2002 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 1 0 6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors
227. ions below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our Gen eral Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too re ceive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library Chapter 13 Third party software GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE To prot
228. ipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone under stands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not Chapter 13 Third party software 419 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 420 the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFI CATION o This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Genera
229. is advised not to place a hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder to prevent mixing up settings Furthermore you must make sure that the Overrule the job ticket setting in that automated workflow is enabled tick the checkbox Before you can use a hotfolder To be able to use the hotfolder function the following steps must be carried out first m In the Settings Editor the system administrator must activate the hotfolder function m In the Settings Editor the system administrator must create a hotfolder and link the hotfolder to an automated workflow m Ona workstation the key operator must create a shared network drive that is linked to the hotfolder m On the desktop of that workstation the key operator can create a shortcut to the hotfolder if desired Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 337 Activate the hotfolder function Activate the hotfolder function Introduction P The information in this section is intended for system administrators NOTE m By factory default the hotfolder function is disabled To use the hotfolder function the system administrator must activate this function once After the system admin istrator activated the hotfolder function up to 10 hotfolders can be defined m For this procedure the System administrator password is required How to activate the hotfolder function 1 aA WNN Open the web browser and enter the host name or IP address of your
230. ite 147 The media catalog in the printer driver Copies Jobname Destination 1 lt Fill in your job name gt wa J Waiting jobs Preview 2 Select the required color pre set or define customized color settings for optimal print quality m Select Office documents to print Microsoft Office documents Microsoft Office documents use the RGB color space Chapter 3 Operating concept 77 Prepare print jobs with the printer driver 78 m Select Photographic content to print documents from photo editing or layout appli cations These documents use the CMYK or RGB color space 2 imageRUNNER ADYANCE C90755 PRO PS US Printing Preferences Jobname lt Fill in your job name gt Photographic content Bob s Respect All 1 sided or 2 sided 2 sided Brown Shoe Marketing Color Pre Set Orientation Portrait Color profiling mode Binding Edge Long edge John s settings Media A4 Top Mail 60 Office documents Binding No binding eis Mute Walter Fashion 148 The color pre sets in the printer driver Chapter 3 Operating concept Prepare print jobs with the printer driver 3 Define the required finishing options 2 imageRUNNER ADYANCE C9075S PRO PS US Printing Preferences lt Fill in your job name gt 1 Staple top right On Sort by set Off Sort by page 1 sided or 2 sided 2 sided Orientation Portrait Binding Edge Lon
231. itor Windows Internet Explorer imageRUNNER ADVANCE 9070S PRO Connected to printer 04 A4 Top Color 100 A4 D 1 White 151 The remote monitor Chapter 3 Operating concept 81 Manage production printing 82 Chapter 3 Operating concept Chapter 4 Operator panel views The dashboard The dashboard Introduction The dashboard is the upper part of the operator panel The dashboard is always visible irrespective of the current view The dashboard shows the following The status of the system The status of the supplies The status of the finishers The current process Instructions for the operator The Continue button after you stopped the printer Illustration The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy The vertical status bar is green No action is required 152 The dashboard No action is required The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy The vertical status bar is orange Next to the status bar the dashboard displays a message that indicates which action is required soon 153 The dashboard Action is required soon The parts of the dashboard 84 The dashboard Number Function 1 Display the status of the machine for example Initializing Printing or Printing will stop Each status message can have a sub message with additional information Chapter 4 Operator panel views The dashboard
232. ituation you can describe the original or copy scan m Ifthe original is unsatisfactory enter a description m Ifthe original is OK but you want a different copy or scan describe the copy With the Brightness setting you can darken 1 to 3 or lighten 1 3 your print With the Contrast setting you can change the differ ences between dark and light areas on your print A negative value reduces the difference a positive value increases the difference With the Color setting describe the color of the original or copy Chapter 7 Copy jobs 187 Description of the copy job settings Output settings Color Black amp white Setting Values Description Color Black o Here choose to print in color or black and white amp white Black and white 188 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Output settings Punching Setting Values Description Punching Here you can define the number of punch holes Die set de pendent Location Here you can define the location of the punch holes Left Top Right Bottom Chapter 7 Copy jobs 189 Description of the copy job settings Output settings Folding Setting Values Description Folding ay Here you can define the folding method for the prints None Half fold CH Tri fold in Tri fold out a Parallel fold
233. ke sure that you replace toner of the correct color Use only toner cartridges intended for use with this machine Black Toner Cartridge Cyan Magenta or Yellow Toner Cartridge A WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames as this may cause toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite resulting in burns or a fire Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames as this may cause the toner to ignite resulting in burns or a fire A CAUTION Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children If these items are ingested consult a physician immediately Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 235 Consumables 236 O IMPORTANT m Store toner cartridges in a cool location away from direct sunlight Recommended storage conditions temperatures below 30 C 86 F and humidity below 80 m Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance Canon is not responsible for any malfunction accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner car tridge For more information see http www canon com counterfeit Genuine Consumables for European region Canon continuously develops technology innovations in Canon Toners Drums and Cartridges sp
234. l Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion o
235. l has a vertical format height gt width Portrait top form The original has a horizontal format width gt Cam height The binding edge of the original is at the left hand side When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable Landscape left form The original has a horizontal format width gt height The binding edge of the original is at the top When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the top image or text on the back side of the sheet is in Landscape readable form Chapter 8 Scan jobs 219 Description of the scan job settings Original settings Size Setting Values Description Size Original in the ADF or on the glass plate m Automatic size detection or m Enter the media format of the original A4 A3 Let When your original has a non standard size you ter Ledger can use the and buttons to enter the exact etc measures You can enter the measures in steps of 1 mm 0 01 inches The text of the Size button changes into Custom Automatic orientation detection or Indicate the orientation of nonstandard size media Portrait Ly Landscape Original settings Background suppression You can use the Background suppression to print a uniform background For example to suppress unwanted spots 220 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Description of the scan job se
236. lack Toner Cartridge Cyan Magenta or Yellow Toner Cartridge If the toner cartridge is not inserted you cannot close the internal cover 304 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Replace the toner cartridge A CAUTION When closing the internal cover be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Close the toner replacement cover A CAUTION When closing the toner replacement cover be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 305 Check the status of the staple cartridges Staples Check the status of the staple cartridges Introduction The following output locations contain staple cartridges to staple your jobs m The stacker stapler m The finisher When all the staple cartridges are sufficiently filled the staple icon in the dashboard is blue When the staple icon in the dashboard is orange or red one of the staple cartridges is empty or almost empty You must refill the staple cartridge as soon as possible To find out which staple cartridge is empty or almost empty you must go to the Printer section of the System view The icon for the staple cartridge that must be refilled is orange or red Even when the staple icon is blue you can still go to the System view to check the number of staples that has been used since the last refill The colors of
237. le use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the library s name and an idea of what it does Copyright C year name of author This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or you
238. lect the color tab 2 From the color tab select Input profiles The Input profiles window appears iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Log out Help Colour Preferences Workflow Configuration Input profiles Output profiles Spot colours E pt fi 1 nent An input profile defi referenc for th t i f r 2 X amp Edit Delete Import Export RGB profiles Description Factory default In use IO Adoberca Adobe RGB 1998 Yes I Applerca Apple RGB Yes I ColorMatchRGB ColorMatch RGB Yes m sRGB SRGB IEC61966 2 1 Yes Yes CMYK profiles Description Factory default In use I FOGRA27_Coated Coated FOGRA27 ISO 12647 2 2004 Yes I FOGRA28_WebCoated Web Coated FOGRA28 ISO 12647 2 2004 Yes I FOGRA29_Uncoated Uncoated FOGRA29 ISO 12647 2 2004 Yes I FOGRA39_Coated Coated FOGRA39 ISO 12647 2 2004 Yes Yes IM GRACoL2006_Coatediv2 GRACOL2006 Coated 1 v2 Yes I JapanColor2001Coated Japan Color 2001 Coated Yes I JapanColor2001Uncoated Japan Color 2001 Uncoated Yes I JapanColor2002Newspaper Japan Color 2002 Newspaper Yes I JapanWebCoated Japan Web Coated Ad Yes m SWOP2006_Coated3v2 SWOP2006 Coated 3 v2 Yes 142 The Input profiles window 3 From the toolbar select the required option to maintain the input profiles 72 Chapter 3 Operating concept Maintain the Output profiles Maintain the Output profiles Introduction An output profile defines a reference color workspace for the color d
239. led The default settings for Print The default Print settings Workflow profile Print settings Confirm start of job Check first set Standard As in id tor rad OR ea e a Unattended The default settings for Output The default Output settings Workflow profile Output settings Offset stacking Seen Job by job Sets as in job Check and print Sets as in job Manual planning Sets as in job Unattended Banners Values and effects of the settings The following table describes the effects of the various values of the settings Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 321 Work with the workflow profiles Values and effects of the settings Setting Destination of print job Destination of copy job Confirm start of job Values Scheduled jobs Effect The jobs are immediately sent to the list of Scheduled jobs The machine will print the jobs in the ripped order You can do the following to rearrange the order in which the jobs will be printed Move jobs to the list of Waiting jobs or m Use To top to move a job to the top of the list of Scheduled jobs Waiting jobs You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be printed As in job Scheduled jobs The submitted jobs go to the destination that is defined in the job ticket or in
240. lign 182 Setting Align Values M Auto Description The automatically set value for this setting Top left Top center Top right An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output for example because you scaled the image to 70 of its original size The Align setting allows you to indicate the position of the image on the sheet Top left moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet Top center moves the image to the centre at the top of the sheet Top right moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet Center left Center left moves the image to centre of the left side of the sheet Center right Bottom left Center moves the image to the centre of the sheet Center right moves the image to the centre of the right side of the sheet Bottom left moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Setting Values Description sSY Bottom cen Output settings Shift Setting Shift Values Margin shift Image shift Bottom center moves the image to the centre of the bottom side of the sheet Bottom right moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet Description Use this setting to increase or decrease the m
241. llowing options m Full adjustment recommended m Quick adjustment From the Calibration method window select Automatic internal sensor and touch OK An instruction window opens Wait a few minutes while the printer performs the 2 Auto gradation adjustment Remove the test prints Press OK Press Finish mCalibrate the printer 1 Shading correction on page 362 wCalibrate the controller 3 Media family calibration on page 366 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 365 Calibrate the controller 3 Media family calibration Calibrate the controller 3 Media family calibration Introduction The Media family is a group of media that uses the same output profile The controller provides by default the media families coated and uncoated An expert can create a new media family for a specific group of media A media family refers to 1 color profile per halftone The following halftones are available Normal a Fine a Error diffusion NOTE m Make sure you perform a media family calibration for the halftones Normal and Fine Media family calibration for the halftone Error diffusion is required when Error diffusion is used in copy jobs and job submission tools like the printer driver and PRISMAprepare When to do You are advised to run the Media family calibration procedure in the following situations m Imm
242. m the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHER WISE ARISING FROM OUT OF ORIN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Chapter 13 Third party software 397 dump restore dump restore 398 Ported to Linux s Second Extended File System as part of the dump and restore backup suit Remy Card lt card Linux EU Org gt 1994 1997 Stelian Pop lt stelian popies net gt 1999 2000 Stelian Pop lt stelian popies net gt Alc e lt www alcove com gt 2000 2002 a Copyright c 1980 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form m
243. media family for a specific group of media A media family refers to 1 of the following halftones a Normal m Fine Error diffusion Before you begin Make sure you have the following information m Key operator password Maintain the Media families 1 From the navigation bar select the Media tab 2 From the Media tab select Media family The Media families window appears iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Log out Help Colour Preferences Workflow Configuration Support x oh Ll Add Copy Edit Delete Name Description Factory default m Coated Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Media f Yes I Coated Extra heavy Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Media f Yes I Uncoated Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Media f I Uncoated Extra heavy Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Media f Yes I Uncoated Heavy Canon iR ADV C9000S PRO series Media f Yes 138 The Media families window 68 Chapter 3 Operating concept Maintain the Media families 3 From the toolbar select the required option to maintain the Media families iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Log out Help Media Colour Preferences Configuration Media Media families ET Media families management A media family is a set of media that have the same output profile and calibration x oh Add Copy Edit Delete Print Name Coated Coated Extra heavy Uncoated Uncoated
244. mes available Furthermore an empty line appears above the se lected subset 4 Define the settings for the new subset 5 Touch the Start button 6 Repeat the steps 4 and 5 if you want to insert more subsets after the new subset or touch Ready when all the additional subsets have been scanned NOTE If you want to insert another subset at another position you must first touch Ready and then repeat the steps 1 to 5 The full overview of all the scanned subsets appears 7 When the job is OK start the creation of the file see below Delete a subset 1 In the preview pane select the subset you want to delete 2 Press Delete 3 When the job is OK start the creation of the file see below Edit a subset 1 In the preview pane select the subset you want to edit 2 Edit the settings NOTE The settings you can edit become available All the settings you cannot change are grayed out 3 When the job is OK start the creation of the file Chapter 8 Scan jobs 231 Combine subsets into one file Define the general parameters and start the creation of the file 1 When the job is OK touch Ready 2 Define the parameters like the user code and the Account ID These values apply to the whole scan job 3 Touch the Start button to start the creation of the file 232 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Consumables Consumables
245. mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 8 27 x11 to13 x 19 2 896 x 765 x 1040 mm 35 28 x 30 12 x 40 94 H Weight unit 108 kg 238 lbs Power require ment Power Con sumption 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 8 A Approximately 225 W Trim unit Inner Booklet Trimmer A1 384 Specification VELIU Description Optional leading edge booklet trimmer for stacker stapler Trim width 2 20 mm 0 079 0 787 Paper weight 52 300 g m 14 lb bond 110 lb cover Paper size Power require ment Power Con sumption Option for A3 SRA3 B4 A4R LGL LTR LTRR 13 x 19 330 x 483 mm 12 x 18 305 x 457 mm 11 x17 279 4 x 431 8 mm Custom sizes 210 x 279 4 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 8 27 x11 to13 x 19 2 From the stacker stapler Approximately 51 W when in operation Stacker stapler Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Punch unit Puncher Unit BG1 2 4 holes Puncher Unit BH1 4 holes Sweden Specification Value Description Optional built in 2 or 4 hole punch unit Paper weight 52 256 g m 14 lb bond 95 lb cover no transparencies Paper size 2 holes A3 A4 A4R LGL LTRR 4 holes France A3 A4 4 holes Sweden A3 A4 A4R 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm LGL LTR LTRR Power require From the finisher or stacker stapler ment Power Con Approximately 56 W when in operation sumption Option for Finisher and stacker stapler Notice
246. mmer A1 Staple prints The name of the puncher unit Create stapled booklets Punch prints Trim booklets may differ according to region Stacker stapler Staple Finisher A1 with Punch Unit BG1 BH1 BF1 The name of the puncher unit The stacker stapler offers the follow ing functionality m Stack prints m Staple prints may differ according to region m Punch prints Copy tray The copy tray is used to receive the prints and copies 18 Chapter 2 Main parts The paper module The paper module Introduction The optional paper module Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 provides three additional paper trays You can load up to 2000 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 lb bond per tray O IMPORTANT m Ifthe printer is in Sleep mode you may not be able to open the paper trays even when pressing the Open buttons In this case press the Sleep Mode key on the operator panel to reactivate the printer then press the Open button on the paper tray you want to open m To detect when multiple papers are fed with Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Paper Deck Double Feeding Detection Kit A1 is required m If Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 is attached the special feeder cannot be used NOTE The following paper sizes can load into Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R and AsR Custom size 139 7 x 182 0 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm
247. mpanies PANTONE Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE identified standards Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color PANTONE and other Pantone Inc trademarks are the property of Pantone Inc Pantone Inc 2007 Pantone Inc is the copyright owner of color data and or software which are licensed to insert name of your company to distribute for use only in combination with insert appropriate name of Licensed Materials PANTONE Color Data and or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of insert appropriate name of Licensed Materials This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST under license from Monotype Imaging Inc UFST is a trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc regis tered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions Chapter 1 Preface Trademarks Copyright 1989 1996 1997 2003 2004 2008 all rights reserved by Monotype Imaging Inc S 7 t C Java POWERED Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates NetFront This product includes NetFront a product of ACCESS Co Ltd for the Internet func tion NetFront is a registered trademark or trademark of ACCESS Co Ltd in Japan and or other countries The We
248. ms Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR Chapter 13 Third party software The BSD License CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEV ER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CON TRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 5 Sparta Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2003 2005 Sparta Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions a
249. n NOTE Instead of 12 3 4 56 78 you must enter the host name or IP address of the PRISMAsync controller Booklet is the name you gave to the hotfolder when you created the auto mated workflow Click Finish A log in screen will appear Enter the user name and the password that were defined when the hotfolder function was enabled in the Settings Editor Click OK The hotfolder is now ready for use If desired you can create a shortcut to the shared network folder on the desktop of the workstation Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 341 Create a hotfolder default ticket default_ticket jdf Create a hotfolder default ticket default_ticket jdf Introduction Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring PDF workflows In these workflows identical PDFs or other printable files with identical settings are printed on a regular basis A hotfolder default ticket default_ticket jdf in the hotfolder determines the settings for the print jobs NOTE m Ifyou want to use the hotfolder default ticket make sure that the Overrule the job ticket setting of the automated workflow in which the hotfolder was created is disabled no tick in the checkbox Otherwise the settings of the automated workflow overrule the settings of the hotfolder default ticket m This procedure is an example of the procedure in Microsoft Windows XP For other operating systems the procedure can vary
250. n in the Trays view you must assign the paper tray to the loaded media manually IMPORTANT Make sure you load the media at the right moment as indicated on the operator panel When to do m The Schedule displays a red bar next to a required media The red bar indicates that a scheduled job now requires a media that is not available in the paper trays m The Schedule displays an orange bar next to a required media The orange bar indi cates that a scheduled job requires media which is either not available in the paper trays or which is available but not in sufficient quantity to finish the job m The current job requires more of the same media than is currently loaded in the paper trays You can add more of the required media into another paper tray m You already want to load and assign media that are required for the next job work ahead Load the media using the Trays view 142 1 Press Trays Select the tray where you want to load the media 3 Load the media as described in one of the following references Load the media into the integrated paper trays on page 237 Load the media into the paper module on page 245 Load the media into the bulk paper modules on page 257 Press Assign The Assign media window opens with media names The previous media in the selected paper tray is highlighted The list displays all the media in the media catalog When the list is empty th
251. n the glass plate Zoom behavior Original Starting point of the zoom function Glass plate Upper left hand corner This section describes the characteristics of the zoom function when you use the automatic document feeder or the glass plate NOTE The zoom function works identical for both copy jobs and scan jobs Scan from the automatic document feeder and use the zoom function 204 The following table shows the zoom behavior of the machine when the originals are scanned from the automatic document feeder The focus is on the centre of the original Chapter 7 Copy jobs The zoom behavior Scan from the automatic document feeder using the zoom function Illustration Description The original is placed face up and in readable form into the automatic document feeder The center of the original is a fixed point and is used as the origin of the image Result of a scan with a 100 zoom factor Result of a scan with a 50 zoom factor NOTE The center of the image is fixed Result of a scan with a 200 zoom factor NOTE The center of the image is fixed Scan from the glass plate and use the zoom function The following table shows the zoom behavior of the machine when the originals are scanned from the glass plate The focus is on the upper right hand corner of the original upper left hand corner of the glass plate Chapter 7 Copy jobs 205 The zoom beh
252. n the name of the first job in the bundle Chapter 6 Print jobs 157 Combine jobs Main actions Description When you touch Split after selecting a bundled job the job is split into the original separate jobs The bundled job is removed The separate jobs are added to the bottom of the list of Waiting jobs You can use the Split function to correct mismatched settings for example Change job settings The Properties window gives access to a pane where you can do the following Change a number of job settings m Change the order of the jobs in the bundle Delete Ticket Delete print jobs Print a job ticket Make a proof How to combine print jobs 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the jobs you want to combine NOTE If all jobs you want to combine have the same label you can also touch Select gt Jobs with label to select all the required jobs at once 3 Press Bundle The operator panel displays an overview of the bundled job 4 If necessary use the Up and Down keys to change the job order 5 Press OK mDelete print jobs on page 128 mPrint a job ticket on page 124 mMake a proof on page 125 158 Chapter 6 Print jobs Change 2 sided into 1 sided and vice versa Change the output settings before printing Change 2 sided into 1 sided and vice versa Introduction Jobs for wh
253. nd the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Sparta Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEV ER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CON TRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 6 Cisco BUPTNIC copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2004 Cisco Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications All rights reserved Chapter 13 Third party software 413 The BSD License 414 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistrib
254. nd the meter readings counters Find the meter readings counters Introduction The Printer section of the System view displays 2 types of counters m The billing counters provide information about the number of sheets that have been printed since the printer was installed You cannot reset the billing counters m The day counters provide information about the number of prints since the last reset You do not need the day counters for the meter reading The day counters are only intended for your own convenience This section describes how to find the counters Find the meter readings 1 On the operator panel press the System button 2 Press Maintenance You can find the required meter readings at the left hand side of the screen 358 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Handle paper jams Handle paper jams When a paper jam occurs follow the instructions on the operator panel O IMPORTANT Make sure you follow the instructions precisely in the correct order to avoid unneces sary service calls Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 359 Auto color mismatch correction Auto color mismatch correction Introduction You can automatically correct color mismatching that occurs in the output The Auto color mismatch correction aligns the position of the four different colors Automatic color mismatch correction cannot be performed during printing Auto color
255. ndled jobs Print speed Print speed asissiisistisississisoiisi sessi iii iranieni 370 Printer Shutdown siani ais Sleep mode a TURAN OEE ena R Ra tasetein teenies Wake tpeississesvatissrscsieteresnatsrsesserstensttiarsesitisee Printer driver Concepts irienner nin aia 60 JOD Preparation mmericnnera aio 77 Printing the Configuration Report Printing the Configuration Report 4 328 Priority for a job Priority fota JOD siieisssscsiesscsdietessisteceateteieis 120 PRISMAprepare Job preparati n sisinio 75 Production printing Production printing oo cesses 80 452 Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 Professional Puncher Integration Unit B1 47 Professional Puncher C1 Professional Puncher C1 cccccccesscesseeseeeseeees 47 Punch the output Puneh the Output sx c csssscciseastaretscnessseecaeseee 211 Punch unit Ponch Unit ss esi2s5 sche dieeseddeossess inini aii 33 Pitti ch Wastes dissssvsied sascaschscasshavssvsavsieadeacsecins 293 Punch waste Check Puncher Punch waste tray Punch waste tray irern Ena RE 33 Puncher Puncher sererken a e E 47 Puncher Unit BG1 BH1 BF1 Puncher Unit BG1 BH1 BF1 neeesser 33 Punching Copy job Print job Q Quality Manually eenn pna aeni dassass 212 R Remove trim waste Remove trim Waste scesescseeeeseteeeeeeeeneeees 296 Reprint a job Reprint a JOD sidsiicsissiesdsatstsesbesisatscysarscesiselsss 122 Reset day counters Re
256. ne emissions Initial startup maximum 0 01 parts per million After short break in period maximum 0 035 parts per million Optimum temperature 15 27 5 C 59 F 81 5 F Relative humidity 25 75 Chapter 12 Specifications 375 Specifications Automatic document feeder Duplex Color Image Reader Unit A1 Specification Value Description Optional automatic document feeder and scanner for du plex scanning of 1 or 2 sided originals 300 originals 80 g m 20 lb bond Scan speed Scan to file 45 ipm 1 sided 44 ipm 2 sided Copy First set 45 ipm 1 sided 44 ipm 2 sided Following sets output at full engine speed Original paper size As AsR A4 A4R A3 B4 Bs BsR BOR 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT STMTR Original paper weight 8 5 x 11 1 sided 38 220 gsm LTR 1 sided 10 lb bond 85 lb cover 8 5 x 11 2 sided 50 220 gsm LTR 2 sided 13 lb bond 85 lb cover Detection Automatic paper size detection Dimensions unit Wx 635 x 605 x 253 mm 25 x 23 82 x 9 96 Dx H Weight unit 39 4 kg 86 9 lbs Approximately 180 W feeder and reader From main unit PRISMAsync controller Specification Description Integrated high performance Oc PRISMAsync color controller for imageRUNNER ADVANCE Cg9000S PRO series 376 Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Specification Features Server type Waiting jobs Scheduled job queues Printed job archive One queue and job management
257. nel Component Function 3 Paper tray key Get immediate and always access to the Trays section on the operator panel to do the follow ing for example m Check the content of all paper trays Load a new media type into a paper tray m Change the media type which is available in one of the paper trays 4 Use the USB port to Connect the spectrophotometer and cali brate the printer and controller Print a file from an USB drive Scan to a USB drive 5 Schedule button Access the Schedule view to manage the jobs in the schedule 6 Jobs button Access all functions to print copy and scan your documents m Manage or change the settings of jobs in the lists of Waiting jobs Scheduled jobs and Printed jobs Carry out copy jobs and scan jobs 7 Trays button Access the Trays view on the operator panel to do the following for example m Check the content of all paper trays Load a new media type into a paper tray or m Change the media type which is available in one of the paper trays Chapter 2 Main parts 27 The operator panel 28 Component 8 System button 9 Dashboard Function Access System view to do the following for example m Check the status of the toner staples and other supplies Read the counters Start maintenance Set up the preferred workflows Change a number of default system set tings m Adjust the brightnes
258. nly possible in the list of Waiting jobs You cannot reprint streaming jobs m The list of Printed jobs does not store proof prints system jobs and jobs that were stopped or deleted m When you shut down the printer all jobs remain present in the list of Printed jobs m The list of Printed jobs can only store jobs To prevent the disk of your system from becoming full jobs must be deleted manually or automatically on a regular basis In the Settings Editor you can indicate the cleaning period then the clean up is carried out at midnight or at the next start up in general the next morning m IfE shredding is enabled the jobs will be shredded after removal from the list of Printed jobs How to reprint a job 1 Touch Jobs gt Printed jobs 122 Nav sw Touch the job s you want to reprint or use the Select button to make a selection To undo the multiple selection and only select 1 job you must touch that job for 2 sec onds Press Copy Touch Queues gt Waiting jobs Touch the job you want to reprint Touch Properties if you want to change the settings for example the number of sets Press Print Chapter 6 Print jobs Reprint a job mDelete print jobs on page 128 Chapter 6 Print jobs 123 Print a job ticket Print a job ticket Introduction Job tickets are used to transfer settings from an application to the printer It can be con
259. nsee must destroy all copies of Software 5 Export Regulations Software including technical data is subject to U S export control laws including the U S Export Administration Act and its associated regulations and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries Licensee agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export re export or import Software Software may not be down loaded or otherwise exported or re exported i into or to a national or resident of Cuba Iraq Iran North Korea Libya Sudan Syria or any country to which the U S has embar goed goods or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Desig nated Nations or the U S Commerce Department s Table of Denial Orders Chapter 13 Third party software GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General
260. o correct the previous entry or touch Cancel to close the numerical keyboard without saving the changes 6 Press OK 7 Press OK Chapter 6 Print jobs 151 Check the first set Check the first set Introduction If you have a large print job and you want to check whether the job is printed correctly it is advised to check the first set before printing all other sets When a job is sent to the printer the submitter can indicate in the job submission application that the first set must be checked However the workflow profile that is selected on the operator panel determines how the printer handles these requests Depending on the selected workflow profile the Check first set setting can have the following values a On a Off m As in job When you use the Check first set function the printed set is subtracted from the indi cated total number of sets for a job For example when you need 10 sets the printer will print the first set and then stop When you continue the job the 9 remaining sets are printed This is different from printing a proof Methods to check the first set You can use 1 of the following methods to indicate that you want to check the first set m Use a workflow profile where Check first set is enabled Then the printer stops after the first set m Enable the function Check first set in the Properties window for a specific job only However you can only change the
261. o so in a manner which does not create potential liability for other Contributors Therefore ifa Contributor includes the Program in a commercial product offering such Contributor Commercial Contributor hereby agrees to defend and indemnify every other Contributor Indemnified Contributor against any losses damages and costs collectively Losses arising from claims lawsuits and other legal actions brought by a third party against the Indemnified Contributor to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of such Commercial Contributor in connection with its distribu tion of the Program in a commercial product offering The obligations in this section do not apply to any claims or Losses relating to any actual or alleged intellectual property infringement In order to qualify an Indemnified Contributor must a promptly notify the Commercial Contributor in writing of such claim and b allow the Commercial Contributor to control and cooperate with the Commercial Contributor in the defense and any related settlement negotiations The Indemnified Contributor may participate in any such claim at its own expense For example a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering Product X That Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor If that Commercial Contributor then makes performance claims or offers warranties related to Product X those performance claims and warranties are such Commercial Contributor s responsibil
262. ocumentation or advertising materials FreeType Project FreeType Engine FreeType library or FreeType Distribution As you have not signed this license you are not required to accept it However as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material only this license or another one contracted with the authors grants you the right to use distribute and modify it Therefore by using distributing or modifying the FreeType Project you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license 4 Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType m freetype nongnu org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType as well as future and wanted addi tions to the library and distribution If you are looking for support start in this list if you haven t found anything to help you in the documentation m freetype devel nongnu org Discusses bugs as well as engine internals design issues specific licenses porting etc Our home page can be found at http www freetype org end of FTL TXT Chapter 13 Third party software J2ME J2ME a Restriction Software is confidential copyrighted information of Canon and title to all copies is retained by Canon and or its licensors Software shall not be modified decom piled disassembled decrypted extracted or otherwise reverse engineered Software may not be leased assigned or sublicensed in whole or in part b Export Regulat
263. olor White A4 tab 223x297 Tab inclusive Cyclic 160g m2 TopColor White Letter tab 9x11 Tab inclusive Cyclic S 163g m2 TopColor White 64 Chapter 3 Operating concept Access the Settings Editor Result You can now use the Settings Editor to make changes in the above listed areas Chapter 3 Operating concept 65 Maintain the Media catalog Maintain the Media catalog Introduction The Media catalog is a list of media with pre defined characteristics including the Media family Before you begin Make sure you have the following information Key operator or system administrator password Maintain the Media catalog 1 From the navigation bar select the Media tab 2 From the Media tab select Media The Media catalog window appears iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Colour Preferences Workflow Configuration Support a A v 2 Add Edit R Up en ca Restore Printer adjus Media Printer adjustment A4 100g m2 TopColor White A4 135g m2 TopColor White A3 100g m2 TopColor White A3 135g m2 TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 105g m2 TopColor White Letter 8 5x11 135g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 105g m2 TopColor White Tabloid 11x17 135g m2 TopColor White A4 tab 223x297 Tab inclusive Cyclic 160g m2 TopColor White Letter tab 9x11 Tab inclusive Cyclic S 163g m2 TopColor White nnaman alaaa
264. on Continue printing after printer stop Continue printing after printer stop 127 Contradiction handling Contradiction handling wees 118 Controller CORCE PE EE EE ET 60 TUA OI sscseissts sets ceseiazssasssveaetesiesievadexevesieeszosets 96 Copy COPY annaia ii 201 Glass platesnei a nR AETR 197 Non standard size originals occ 209 Scan now print later ssssssssesseesessesreseesressesee 210 447 Copy function ADOUE scictisecanvcnianisasireinmarerasey 170 Copy job LOR asidedd arepan EER 177 Adjust iage siistisi iana 187 Ali p senarssimnsiiassraima ania 182 Automated settings Background suppression Bindine sessestssies sesvessssessevsees Binding edge tsiccscesisecctecacsnelersscveeiacaeoieriierste Color black and white ween Layout sscsssssssssssiseisess sessessossessissesecsoscsssssncstare Margin erase sisscsssscssesscvsavedtdasecsccssconsvesneatexs Media vi scatescestsaeics Number of sets Original type Print deliveryesecesveidveces asdhetercieceecsasenreeaceeste Punching diss sissstssiesdsareszsavsrssassiei ci iiinis Rename oc Separator sheets SHC issiro SIZE ss ENEN A E EO EE StAPLES issoria sesesisssevssovesdiesavesedevssosesesesaiens Trimming asccsssissessesesessssssssnstssssesssssosseisecscess ZOON Sas cessSocchssea iasees A RET Copy jobs Access other functions c ccccecseeseessseeeeeees 203 Combined copy job weiss 202 Minimize sssrinin 2
265. on printing Define settings per page for complex print jobs Send print jobs to the printer m Send print jobs to the PostScript printers in the network PRISMAaccess Optional software PRISMAsync con troller Workflow management for production environ ments Easy integration in PDF workflow Job submission via web Acceptance and preparation of incoming jobs Link to PRISMAprepare Link to all production printers Link to PRISMAarchive or your local reprint archive Process print jobs m Rip print jobs Remote Monitor Chapter 3 Operating concept Monitor production printing remotely Monitor remotely when operator intervention is needed Operating concept Component 7 Operator panel Main task Manage production printing from the Schedule view Monitor your print and copy jobs Load and assign media to the media trays Manage jobs from the Jobs view Schedule print and copy jobs m Change job properties if required m Define and handle copy jobs m Define and handle scan jobs Manage media from the Trays view m Change the media that is currently assigned to a paper tray m Assign the media to the paper tray Manage the system from the System view Calibrate the system Perform maintenance tasks a Set default workflow and printer settings m View the media catalog add temporary media and perform media registration 8 imageRUNNER AD VANCE C9075S PRO C9065
266. ontribution No hardware per se is licensed hereunder c Recipient understands that although each Contributor grants the licenses to its Contri butions set forth herein no assurances are provided by any Contributor that the Program does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entity Each Contributor disclaims any liability to Recipient for claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise As a condition to exer cising the rights and licenses granted hereunder each Recipient hereby assumes sole re sponsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed if any For example if a third party patent license is required to allow Recipient to distribute the Program it is Recipient s responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Program d Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution if any to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement 3 REQUIREMENTS 442 A Contributor may choose to distribute the Program in object code form under its own license agreement provided that a it complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and b its license agreement i effectively disclaims on behalf of all Contributors all warranties and conditions express and implied including warranties or conditions of title and non infringement and implied war
267. or key operators Before creating a shared network folder on a workstation the following actions must be carried out first m Enable the hotfolder function Create an automated workflow including a hotfolder NOTE This procedure describes the creation of a shared network folder on a workstation running the Microsoft Windows XP operating system However depending on the operating system of your workstation the procedure can be different Illustration Map Network Drive x Windows can help you connect to a shared network folder and assign a drive letter to the connection so that you can access the folder using My Computer Specify the drive letter for the connection and the folder that you want to connect to Drive fY gt Folder 12 34 56 78 Bookled 7 Browse Example server share T Reconnect at logon Connect using a different user name Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server os eT ene _ 532 Create a shared network drive How to create a shared network folder on a workstation 1 2 w 4 Open Windows Explorer Click Tools gt Map Network Drive Select a drive letter for the shared network folder Enter the name of the shared network folder for example 12 34 56 78 Booklet or click the Browse button to navigate to the required location 340 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Create a shared network folder on a workstatio
268. or the first time adjust the size change plate to match the paper size being loaded m When loading paper into the paper tray make sure that the paper size setting is the same size of the paper that is being loaded IMPORTANT Do not subject the paper holder plate to shock when loading paper into the paper tray as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the machine Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 249 Load the media into the paper module O IMPORTANT m Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out before loading it into the paper tray m Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark on the inside of the paper tray NOTE m If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load follow those instructions m When paper is loaded the side facing up is the one printed on m Ifproblems occur such as poor print quality or paper jams try turning the paper stack over and reload it However textured paper 1 sided coated paper and paper already printed on cannot be turned over Change to new paper m When loading paper make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed 20 mm 13 16 If the height of the paper stack exceeds 20 mm 13 16 the edges of the paper stack may become curled or creased and poor print quality may result 5 Gently push the paper tray back into
269. ore each set Chapter 6 Print jobs 117 Contradiction handling Contradiction handling Be aware that if you change settings you might make contradicting settings If you make contradicting settings the preview pane informs you how to solve the contradictions The contradicting settings are marked orange and indicate where contradictions are found The green check marks indicate where to find the settings that you must change to resolve the contradictions 118 Chapter 6 Print jobs Print an urgent job immediately Manage print jobs Print an urgent job immediately Introduction When a job must be printed urgently you can give that print job priority over all other print jobs The Print now button allows you to print a job immediately When you use the Print now button the active print job amp will be paused as soon as the current set is ready To print a job as soon as possible but not immediately you can use the To top function Location of the Print now button The Print now button is available in the Scheduled jobs view NOTE To give priority to a job in the list of Waiting jobs you must first touch Print to send the job to the list of Scheduled jobs There you can select the job and touch Print now To give priority to a job in the list of Printed jobs you must first reprint the job When the job is in the list of Scheduled jobs you can select the jo
270. ork con figuration system preferences job preferences and media for example For convenience reasons a subset of frequently used settings is accessible through the operator panel NOTE You need the key operator PIN or the system administrator PIN to make changes in this section This PIN is the same as used when accessing the Settings Editor applica tion on the PRISMAsync controller Settings available through the operator panel Group of settings Available settings Short description About m Serial number read only m Version of printer soft ware read on ly The About section allows you to look up the serial number and software version of the printer You can also upgrade the printer software through this section Follow the instructions on the operator panel when you upgrade the software Software licenses m Upload license When you have a new license to activate a new feature on the printer you can up load the license through this section After uploading the license the feature becomes active Follow the instructions on the operator panel when you upgrade the software Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel Group of settings Logging Save the datad ump file Save the trace file Print the config uration report Available settings Short desc
271. ot permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circum stance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is in tended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range Chapter 13 Third party software GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Li brary under
272. ouch the Job name button a keyboard appears Number of sets Setting VELITE Description Number of Use this setting to define the number of copies You sets can enter a value from 1 65 000 The default value is 1 Destination Setting VEIE Description Destination Scheduled Add the copy job to the list of Scheduled jobs in the jobs Jobs view Waiting Add the copy job to the list or Waiting jobs in the jobs Jobs view 192 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Description of the copy job settings Separator sheets Setting Values Description Separator On When the Separator sheets setting is enabled a sepa 8 sheets rate sheet is inserted automatically before each set of a job to create a clear distinction between two sets Separator sheets are always empty In the Settings Editor select a media from the media catalog use as separator sheets You can also indicate the feed direc tion of the separator sheets long edge feed or short edge feed No separator sheet will be inserted before each set Chapter 7 Copy jobs 193 Feeding originals into the ADF Feeding originals into the ADF Introduction 194 O IMPORTANT Use the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time The printer automatically feeds the originals onto the glass plate and scans them The size of the original is automatically detected and the document is scann
273. over When the setting is enabled the corre sponding setting Media becomes enabled When the setting Back cover is enabled you can se lect a media from the media catalogue Print sides Here you can select the sides of the back cover you want to print on Both sides Front side Back side None Chapter 6 Print jobs 107 Description of the print job settings Output settings Align 108 Setting Align Values M Auto Description The automatically set value for this setting Top left Top center Top right An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output for example because you scaled the image to 70 of its original size The Align setting allows you to indicate the position of the image on the sheet Top left moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet Top center moves the image to the centre at the top of the sheet Top right moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet Center left Center left moves the image to centre of the left side of the sheet Center right Bottom left Center moves the image to the centre of the sheet Center right moves the image to the centre of the right side of the sheet Bottom left moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet Chapter 6 Print jobs D
274. ower plug s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp dusty or smoky loca tion dust can build up around the power plug and become damp This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire 346 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Clean the glass plate and underside the feeder Clean the glass plate and underside the feeder Introduction This section describes how to clean the glass plate and the underside of the cover plate O IMPORTANT If the glass plate or underside of the cover plate is dirty the original may not be scanned clearly or the size of the original may be detected incorrectly NOTE This procedure is necessary only if Duplex Color Image Reader Unit A1 is attached Clean the glass plate 1 Clean the glass plate and the underside of the cover plate with a cloth dampened with water and then wipe them clean with a soft dry cloth O IMPORTANT Do not dampen the cloth too much as this may damage the original or break the machine Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 347 Clean the automatic document feeder ADF Clean the automatic document feeder ADF Introduction If originals that have been fed through the feeder have streaks or appear dirty clean the feeder s scanning area O IMPORTANT m Do not dampen the cloth too
275. owing types of paper into the Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Doing so may cause a paper jam Severely curled or wrinkled paper Envelopes Thin straw paper Heavy paper more than 300 g m 158 lb index Thin paper less than 52 g m 14 lb bond Paper that has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer Do not print on the reverse side of this paper m Fan the stack of paper well before loading it and align the edges of the paper stack on a flat surface The Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 can only accommodate paper from 52 to 300 g m 14 lb bond to 110 lb cover in weight If you select the optional Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 when it has no paper or if the Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 runs out of paper during a print job a screen asking you to load paper appears on the touch panel display 246 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the paper module NOTE m Ifa message prompting you to load paper appears during printing the remaining prints are automatically made after you load the correct paper If you select another paper source the remaining prints are made after you press OK m When changing from plain to coated paper in the Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 you may have to wait a moment as temperature control of the warm air that fans the paper is required m The following paper sizes can load into Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm A3
276. own O IMPORTANT m When using the glass plate to copy or scan thick originals such as books or maga zines do not press down hard on the feeder m Blocking the original output area can result in damaging originals and printing may not take place correctly Therefore do not place objects into the original output area m Ifthe glass plate is dirty print quality may deteriorate Make sure the feeding belt and glass plate are clean Illustration 12 The ADF includes the glass plate Chapter 2 Main parts 23 The automatic document feeder ADF Components and their functions ADF components and their functions 24 No Function 1 Feeder cover Open this cover to clear a paper jam Original set indicator Lights when originals are placed in the original supply tray Original supply tray Originals placed here are automatically fed into the feeder sheet by sheet Place originals into this tray with the surface that you want to scan face up Auxiliary original supply tray Pull out this tray when feeding large paper Auxiliary original output tray Pull out this tray when outputting large paper Original output tray Originals that have been scanned from the original supply tray are output into the original output tray in the order they are fed in the feeder Slide guides Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the original 10 Document feed scannin
277. p right Adjust mage 9 Description Original The Original pane shows the settings you can define for the paper originals File The File pane shows the settings you can define for the file 3 Job The Job pane shows the generic settings you can define for the whole job 4 Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output Furthermore this pane gives access to the templates 5 Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can carry out Chapter 8 Scan jobs 217 Description of the scan job settings Original settings 1 or 2 sided Setting Values Description 1 or 2 sid The automatically set value for this setting ed Only the front side contains an image or text Both the front side and the back side contain an image or text 218 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Description of the scan job settings Original settings Original type Setting Description Original The automatically set value for this setting type The original has a vertical format height gt width The binding edge is at the left hand side When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the Portrait left image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form The binding edge of the original is at the top When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable The origina
278. page 139 138 Chapter 6 Print jobs Description of the Trays view Description of the Trays view Introduction The Trays view has the following functions a Display the current content and filling level of the paper trays This section describes the items of the Trays view Change the media that is currently assigned to a paper tray Assign media to a paper tray when you already loaded the media Unassign media from a paper tray NOTE The trays view also opens when you press the paper tray key on the operator panel Illustration 1 Dre 80 gin White Adinsert 2 as D insert 80 gim White Q Normal A3 gt ml a 4315 80 gin White Oce Red Normal As aD 20 aD 6 Custom 20x30 gin White gim White 200 x 300 mm 80 gim white 3 eH 442 80 gin White 7 Pe f 17 8 x254 mm 80 gi 4 E Normal Letter puny acct Letter 6 511 80 gm White E Schedule Jobs jem S 222 Example of a configuration with 1 paper module Chapter 6 Print jobs 139 Description of the Trays view The items of the Trays view Description of the Trays view Num Item Function ber 1 Content of the paper Indicate the current content and filling level of the trays paper trays The Trays view
279. paper Pass through mode All media supported by the main engine Dimensions WxDxH 746 x 793 x 1407 mm 29 37 X 31 22 x 55 39 Weight 61 kg 134 5 lbs Power require ment 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 1 0 A Power Con sumption Approximately 85 W Folder Paper Folding Unit G1 386 Specification VEIT Optional unit with various folding options Letter fold in letter fold out double parallel fold Z fold half folding Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Specification Value Folding out Output to folding unit output tray put and out Letter fold in C fold letter fold out 40 sheets put capacity Double parallel fold 20 sheets Output to staple finisher or booklet maker top tray or lower tray a Z fold half fold A3 B4R 11 x 17 30 sheets a Z fold half fold A4R LTRR LGLR 10 sheets Output to staple finisher or booklet maker escape tray a Z fold half fold 10 sheets Paper weight 52 105 g m 14 lb bond 28 lb bond Z folding letter fold in C fold letter fold out Accordion Z fold double parallel folding half fold 52 90 g m 14 lb bond 24 lb bond Double parallel fold Paper size Z fold A4R B4R A3 LTRR LGL 11 x 17 279 4 x 431 8 mm Letter fold in C fold Ag4R LTRR Letter fold out A4R LTRR Double parallel fold A4R LTRR LGL Half fold A4R LTRR Dimensions 336 x 793 x 1190 mm WxDxH 13 23 X 31 22 x 46
280. per below the loading limit of the paper holder plate 254 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Adjust the media size for the paper module A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper IMPORTANT m Paper that has been rolled or curled must be straightened before loading it into the paper deck m Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark on the inside of the paper deck m Never place paper or other items into the empty part of the paper deck next to the paper stack Doing so may damage the printer NOTE m If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load follow those instructions m When paper is loaded the side facing up is the one printed on m If problems occur such as poor print quality or paper jams try turning the paper stack over and reload it However textured paper 1 sided coated paper and paper already printed on cannot be turned over Change to new paper m When loading paper make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed 20 mm 13 16 If the height of the paper stack exceeds 20 mm 13 16 the edges of the paper stack may become curled or creased and poor print quality may result Change the paper deck s size plate to match the new paper size Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 255 Adjust the media size for the pa
281. per module 7 Gently push the paper tray back into the printer until it clicks into place in the closed position The inside lifter automatically rises and prepares the paper deck for printing A CAUTION When returning the paper deck to its original position be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury mLoad the media into the paper module on page 245 256 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the bulk paper modules Load the media into the bulk paper modules Introduction The bulk paper module Paper Deck Unit A1 POD Deck Lite A1 allows you to load up to 4000 sheets of paper 64 g m 17 lb bond or 3500 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 lb bond A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper O IMPORTANT m Ifthe printer is in Sleep mode you may not be able to open the bulk paper module In this case press the Sleep Mode key on the operator panel to reactivate the printer then press the Open button on the bulk paper module m Never place paper or other items into the empty part of the paper deck next to the paper stack Doing so may cause paper jams m A paper blower is attached inside the paper deck Do not insert paper clips or other foreign objects into the blower m Paper jams may occur if you load paper into Paper Deck Unit A1 POD Deck Lite A1 in alow humidity environment If paper j
282. per or envelopes as they are fed into the special feeder NOTE m If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load follow those instructions m When the paper is loaded into the special feeder the side facing up is the one printed on m If problems such as poor print quality or paper jams occur try turning the paper stack over and reload it If you are loading envelopes into the special feeder m Take five envelopes loosen them as shown then stack them together Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 281 Load the media into the special feeder multipurpose tray m Place the envelopes on a clean level surface then press all the way around the envelopes by hand in the direction of the arrows to remove any curls Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes Hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly so that they and the sealed or glued portion stay flat J Flap O IMPORTANT m Ifyou use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit m Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they will be fed 4 Feeding Direction a LY 282 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the special feeder multipurpose
283. perational requirements and restric tions Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly and to avoid damaging the machine or property NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a proce dure Reading these notes is highly recom mended Chapter 1 Preface 11 Notes for the reader Indicates Indicates an operation that must not be per formed Read these items carefully and make sure not to perform the described operations 12 Chapter 1 Preface Abbreviations used in this manual Abbreviations used in this manual Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows Vista operating system Microsoft Windows 7 operating system Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows operating system Novell NetWare Apple Macintosh Apple Mac Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server Windows Server 2003 Windows XP Windows XP Professional Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Windows NetWare Macintosh Mac Chapter 1 Preface 13 Available documentation Available documentation For imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075S PRO C9065 PRO the following information is available m Operating information m Safety Instructions for the printer
284. pi when you want to generate a very small file m Select 300 dpi when you want to view or archive the generated file m Select 600 dpi when you want to print or edit the generated file File settings Size Setting Description Size All media Select the media size of the resulting file sizes that the media cata log supports File settings Zoom Setting Values Description Zoom Fit to page When Fit to page is On the image is resized so it fits onto the page When Fit to page is OfF the original size of the image is maintained Percent Use the and buttons to reduce or enlarge the size of the image from 25 to 400 The preview pane immediately shows the results of your action 222 Chapter 8 Scan jobs Description of the scan job settings File settings Align Setting Align Values Description Vv The automatically set value for this setting Auto size of the output for example because you scaled the image to 70 of its original size The Align setting Top left allows you to indicate the position of the image on the sheet Top left moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media Top center moves the image to the centre at the top of the sheet Top center Top right moves the image to the upper right corner of the sh
285. ples 267 Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module 13 Align the inner size change plate with the marks for the desired paper size 13 AR N 1218 Bods co CD T76 M a p 53 3309 4830 ee O IMPORTANT m Make sure to align the inner size change plate with the marks for the desired paper size There are two locations with marks for paper size on the top of the inner size change plate Align the inner size change plate with the desired marks m Make sure that the size change plate is properly aligned with the marks for the desired paper size If the size change plate is not properly aligned Pod Deck Lite may become damaged 14 Fix the inner size change plate with the two blue screws using a coin or something similar while slightly holding its centre front portion and pressing it away from you m Fasten the right blue screw before fastening the left blue screw 268 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module 15 IMPORTANT m Make sure to align the inner size change plate with the marks for the desired paper size There are two marks for paper size on the top of the paper deck Align the inner size change plate with the desired marks m Make sure that the size change plate is properly aligned with the marks for the desired paper size If the size change plate is not properly aligned Pod Deck Lite may become damaged Inser
286. printable surface to ensure the optimal reproduction of images When a transparency is loaded into the paper drawer of the main unit the side facing down is the one printed on When the transparency is loaded into the special feeder POD Deck Lite A1 or Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 the side facing up is the one printed on Important remarks and notes O IMPORTANT m Only A4 LTR transparencies can be used When loading transparencies be careful not to touch the printable surface Hold transparencies by their edges Fan the stack of transparencies well before loading it in a paper source Loading transparencies without fanning them may cause a paper jam Do not load transparencies into a paper source while a print job is in progress This may cause paper jams Only use transparencies that are specially recommended for use in this printer Other chemicals can damage the printer To prevent paper jams or the folding of transparencies it is recommended that you remove them from the output tray as soon as possible Place unused transparencies into the box in which they came Leaving them in the paper tray for an extended period of time may cause them to adhere to one another resulting in paper jams Avoid storing transparencies in a location subject to high temperatures or humidity If transparencies are adhering to one another and a paper jam occurs remove them fan them well make sure that fewer than 100 transparencies are load
287. printer is ready to print jobs The power buttons and power modes Power mode Sleep button CRE pan Description Low power The printer automatically enters the low power mode after the time that was defined in the Set tings Editor and no button was pressed The printer wakes up when a job arrives in the list of Scheduled jobs or when you touch a but ton The printer will start to warm up Sleep mode On Off The printer automatically goes from the low power mode into the sleep mode after the time that was defined in the Settings Editor You can also put the printer into sleep mode manually Press the Sleep button to do this The printer will enter the sleep mode as soon as the list of Scheduled jobs is empty The printer will wake up from the sleep mode when you press the Sleep button or when the calendar timer expires The printer will also wake up when a printable job arrives in the list of Scheduled jobs provided that the function Automatic wake up in the Settings Editor is enabled Chapter 5 Power information 95 Turn on the controller Turn on the controller Introduction You are advised to turn on the system in the following order 1 The controller 2 The printer Illustration On Off ol 169 The location of the on off button Turn on the controller 1 Use one of the following options to turn on the controller m Press the Sleep button at th
288. project since 2001 An additional copyright section has been added as Part 4 below also under a BSD license for the work contributed by Sun Microsystems Inc to the project since 2003 Code has been contributed to this project by many people over the years it has been in development and a full list of contributors can be found in the README file under the THANKS section Part 1 CMU UCD copyright notice BSD like Copyright 1989 1991 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work 1996 1998 2000 Copyright 1996 1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the Uni versity of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFOR NIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM AGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE
289. quality Introduction The Adjust image setting enables you to define the copy and scan quality manually Depending on the situation you can describe the original or the copy scan Adjust the image to improve the copy and scan quality 1 Place the originals face up into the ADF or place 1 original face down on the glass plate 2 Touch Jobs gt Copy Scan gt Copy job 3 Press Adjust image A window opens 4 Determine if you need to describe the original or the copy scan m Ifthe original is not okay describe the original m Ifthe original is okay but you want a different copy or scan describe the copy 5 If required adjust the following settings m Brightness Contrast Color 6 Press OK 212 Chapter 7 Copy jobs Chapter 8 Scan jobs Introduction to the scan function Introduction to the scan function Introduction The scan function allows you to convert paper originals into digital documents using scan profiles The system offers several factory default scan profiles However you can change and add scan profiles at the Settings Editor Illustration eg W Copy job 4 Combined copy job Booklet job Ean 2 A A aA A TIFF viewing archiving 3 PDF viewing archiving Scan to USB TIFF printing 600 dpi 300 dpi PDF printing 600 dpi 300 dpi XO Schedule Jobs Trays Bs System 31
290. r A1 when Inner Booklet Trimmer A1 is installed O IMPORTANT m Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine When an optional unit s cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge discard the punch waste discard the trim waste or clear paper or staple jams prints may still be output if other optional units are operating normally and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure m When the trim waste tray is full you cannot make copies or prints using the trimming options Remove the trim waste 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 296 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Remove the trim waste 3 Discard the trim waste O IMPORTANT Make sure that the trim waste tray is completely emptied 4 Return the trim waste tray to its original position Always make sure to insert the trim waste tray as far as it can go y y g Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 297 Remove the trim waste A CAUTION When closing the front cover of the finisher be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury 298 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Check the status of the toner reservoir and waste toner container Toner Check the status of the toner reservoir and waste toner container Introduction You can check the status of the toner reservoirs in the da
291. r could jam m Ifyou are printing on envelopes do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumu late in the output tray Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have ac cumulated 278 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the special feeder multipurpose tray NOTE Envelopes may be creased in the printing process For high quality printouts use paper recommended by your authorized dealer Standard Size You can select standard inch paper or A or B series paper Customer size You can load nonstandard paper sizes 100 0 x 148 0 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm 4 x 5 7 8 to 13 x 19 1 4 Envelope The following envelopes can be loaded into the special feeder COM10 No 10 104 7 x 241 3 mm 1 8 x 94 ISO Bs5 176 x 250 mm 7 x 9 7 8 Monarch 98 4 x 190 5 mm 3 7 8 x 714 ISO Cs5 162 x 229 mm 6 3 8 x 9 DL 110 x 220 mm 4 3 8 x 8 5 8 Nagagata 3 120 x 235 mm 4 3 4 x 9 1 4 Yougatanaga 3 120 x 235 mm 4 3 4 x 9 1 4 Kakugata 2 240 x 332 mm 1 2 x 13 1 2 Load the media into the special feeder 1 Open the special feeder Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 279 Load the media into the special feeder multipurpose tray If you are feeding large paper pull out the auxiliary tray al feeder A Make sure the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark 5
292. r example because m The required media are out of stock or m You first want to make a proof Then you must move the job back to the list of Waiting jobs How to print a scheduled job later 1 Touch Jobs gt Queues 2 If collapsed first touch to expand the list of Scheduled jobs 3 Touch the job s you want to print later or use the Select button to make a selection To undo the multiple selection and only select 1 job you must touch that job for 2 sec onds NOTE To select the active print job amp you must first press the Stop key 2 times to stop the job However the printing continues until the buffer is empty You must touch the Continue button to resume printing 4 Press Move The job is moved to the list of Waiting jobs mMake a proof on page 125 Chapter 6 Print jobs 121 Reprint a job Reprint a job Introduction NOTE The following description is only applicable when the setting Printed jobs in the Settings Editor is enabled Print jobs that have been completed are moved from the list of Scheduled jobs list to the list of Printed jobs The Printed jobs list helps you to reprint jobs quicker and eas ier What you need to know about the list of Printed jobs m When you want to reprint a job the selected job is always copied to the list of Waiting jobs first m You cannot change the job settings in the list of Printed jobs This is o
293. r readings icici sesessscsssssacssesesssessiesisecees 358 Minimize MINIMIZE ei sans esate ete desokccestascaesseecieinedsdisceaes 203 Monitor remotely Monitor remotely oo eeeeseeeseseteeeeeneeeeees 80 Multi Drawer Paper Deck Lite A1 Multi Drawer Paper Deck Lite A1 0 19 Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Adjust paper size Change paper size Loading papel sissies Index N New Scan to fle sachs sissies essen dake 227 Non standard size originals Non standard size originals occ 209 Normal Normal 3 ciccies isi sac faedstiads astiasesth caved caastdseastes 366 Number of sets Number of sets cc ccccccscesssesscesscesseeseesseeeseees 151 COPY JOD wsasssesisesenecasasssecssestonsssisestsssesesssieas3s 192 Pint JOD oes ma aen T EITE 116 O Oc PRISMAprepare CONCEP E rnea SEREA 60 Offset stacking C ETSt StACKING reus unne oninia 166 Changes in the Properties window 5b Every N sesir nanne 166 TV POS seeds vised Ateher n E EAEN 155 Operator attention light Descriptio esensi r sn n a A 30 Operator panel Brightness Clean ies Cleaning sniseninesie sipiris iiss Contrast siiscscisicasssccnesestsnvesvstenvessacebessicsscsesees Main components sssenirensn iania 26 Original setting Da OF D Sided lisse a cvevtacesvisysassashesssnsassisass sues ceived 174 Original type Original Setting ennnen 175 Scam JOD siaa E EOR 219 Output Ppisa eE aa 211 Staple svssscsesssdedecbdoesisessoseisasce
294. r school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker Chapter 13 Third party software GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice That s all there is to it Chapter 13 Third party software 435 Eclipse Public License v 1 0 Eclipse Public License v 1 0 THE ACCOMPANYING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS ECLIPSE PUBLIC LICENSE AGREEMENT ANY USE REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM CONSTITUTES RECIPIENT S ACCEP TANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT 1 DEFINITIONS Contribution means a in the case of the initial Contributor the initial code and documentation distributed under this Agreement and b in the case of each subsequent Contributor i changes to the Program and ii additions to the Program where such changes and or additions to the Program originate from and are distributed by that particular Contributor A Contribution originates from a Contributor if it was added to the Program by such Contributor itself or anyone acting on such Contributor s behalf Contributions do not include additions to the Program which i are separate modules of software distributed in conjunction with the Program under their own license agreement an
295. r staple jams prints may still be output if other optional units are operating normally and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure m If necessary remove all the output paper in the booklet tray before replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit m This procedure is necessary only if Booklet Finisher A1 is attached NOTE Since both the front and inner staple cartridges need to be replaced when staples run out in the saddle stitcher unit we recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized dealer before your stock runs out Replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitch unit 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 312 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit 2 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit F C5 4 Press the light blue area on both sides of the staple cartridge then open the staple case cover Hold the staple case cover by its left and right sides and then lift it and slide it off 5 Lift and pull out the empty staple cartridge Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 313 Replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit O 7 8 Squeeze the arrow indicated in step 4 and its twin on the opposite side to release the empty staple cartridge IMPORTANT When replacing the staple cartridges replace both the front and b
296. r use the previous version or transfer the rights to another person or entity Chapter 13 Third party software Adobe Flash Player in NetFront Except when required by an applicable law Canon or its licensors disclaim all warranties and representations whether expressed implied or otherwise including the warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Also there is no warranty of non infringement The Software is not designed intended or licensed for use in hazardous environments requiring fail safe controls including without limitation the design con struction maintenance or operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or commu nication systems air traffic management or control systems life support systems or weapons systems Chapter 13 Third party software 409 The BSD License The BSD License 410 Various copyrights apply to this package listed in various separate parts below Please make sure that you read all the parts Up until 2001 the project was based at UC Davis and the first part covers all code written during this time From 2001 onwards the project has been based at SourceForge and Networks Associates Technology Inc hold the copyright on behalf of the wider Net SNMP community covering all derivative work done since then An additional copyright section has been added as Part 3 below also under a BSD license for the work contributed by Cambridge Broadband Ltd to the
297. ranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose ii effectively excludes on behalf of all Contributors all liability for damages including direct indirect special incidental and consequential damages such as lost profits iii states that any provisions which differ from this Agreement are offered by that Con tributor alone and not by any other party and iv states that source code for the Program is available from such Contributor and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange When the Program is made available in source code form Chapter 13 Third party software COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 a it must be made available under this Agreement and b a copy of this Agreement must be included with each copy of the Program Contributors may not remove or alter any copyright notices contained within the Program Each Contributor must identify itself as the originator of its Contribution if any in a manner that reasonably allows subsequent Recipients to identify the originator of the Contribution 4 COMMERCIAL DISTRIBUTION Commercial distributors of software may accept certain responsibilities with respect to end users business partners and the like While this license is intended to facilitate the commercial use of the Program the Contributor who includes the Program in a commer cial product offering should d
298. rary and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions Chapter 13 Third party software GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE a The modified work must itself be a software library m b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License m d Ifa facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the ap plication does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably consid
299. received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Chapter 13 Third party software GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary
300. red to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recip ient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would n
301. ridge while the printer is printing m The color of the toner to replace is displayed on the touch panel display If multiple toner cartridges must be replaced replace the toner cartridges in the following order Black Yellow Magenta Cyan m Ifyou continue copying or printing in black and white after cyan magenta or yellow toner runs out do not remove the depleted toner cartridges from the ma chine m You can display an error message informing the user that the remaining toner is low Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 301 Replace the toner cartridge NOTE m Iftoner runs out during a print job the remaining prints are made after you replace the toner cartridge m Ifblack toner is left you can continue copying and printing in black and white However if a job is interrupted because cyan magenta or yellow toner runs out copying and printing in black and white is only possible for functions other than the function being used for the interrupted job m After replacing toner cartridges if printed colors are different from the colors printed before you replaced the toner cartridges perform an automatic gradation adjustment Replace the toner cartridge 1 Open the toner replacement cover holding both sides 2 On the operator panel touch System 3 On the operator panel touch the corresponding arrow button of the toner cartridge that must be replaced 4 Wait for the internal co
302. ription When an error occurs the help desk of your printer supplier can ask you to create and send a datadump file The datadump file is a zip file that contains detailed technical information about your system Furthermore the system can store trace log files in zip files You can save both zip files to a USB location The configuration report contains infor mation about the configuration of your printing system for example information about the system configuration controller configuration or network settings You can print the configuration report for backup purposes for example Follow the instructions on the operator panel when you save a file or print a re port Connectivity MAC address read only Host name Link speed and connection type DHCP en abled TCP IP ad dress Subnet mask Default gate way Primary DNS suffix DNS suffix fol lows domain Test the TCP IP connec tion The Connectivity section contains the main settings to integrate the printer into a network After you have adapted the network settings you can test the connec tion from here Follow the instructions on the operator panel when you adapt the network set tings Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 329 Access Settings Editor settings via the operator panel Group of settings Available settings Date and time System of mea
303. roduction This section describes how to replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit of Staple Finisher A1 Booklet Finisher A1 O IMPORTANT m Use only staple cartridges intended for use in this machine See Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit on page 33 m Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine When an optional unit s cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge discard the punch waste discard the trim waste or clear paper or staple jams prints may still be output if other optional units are operating normally and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure NOTE m We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized dealer before your stock runs out Remove the orange seal that holds the staples together after you place the staple cartridge into the staple case Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit A 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 308 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit 2 Pull out the staple case from the stapler unit holding it by its green tab 3 Turn over the staple case and open the cover while pressing PUSH on both sides of the staple case NOTE m Align the staple case as indicated in the diagram m The cover will not open if there are any staples remaining even if you pres
304. ront The output has a horizontal format width gt height The binding edge of the print is on the left side EE Landscape When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the left text or image is in readable form m The output has a horizontal format width gt k height m The binding edge of the print is at the top Landscape m When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the top image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form This means that every back of a 2 sided print is upside down compared to the front Media The tile is read only You can change the required media for the job through the media button in the preview pane on the right side When more than one media type has been defined for a job a separate button for each media type is displayed 106 Chapter 6 Print jobs Description of the print job settings You can only change to media with the same size for example from A4 blue to A4 green Output settings Cover Setting Values Cover Print sides Description Here you can indicate that the print job requires a front cover When the setting is enabled the corre sponding setting Media becomes enabled Here you can select the sides of the front cover you want to print on Both sides m Front side m Back side a None Back cover Media Here you can indicate that the print job requires a back c
305. roperties or touch the job 2x to open the Properties window Touch the Align button Make the required changes Press OK Press OK Nam fw mShift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout on page 164 Chapter 6 Print jobs 163 Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout Introduction If you want to create space for staples or punch holes for example you can use the Align function However when the Align function is not precise enough you can use the Margin shift and Image shift functions These functions allow you to shift the image more precisely The preview in the right hand pane of the operator panel displays the consequences of your changes If you shift the margin too much you may loose part of the image The Shift function has 2 options m Margin shift allows you to increase or decrease the margin to create more binding space for example With Margin shift you can shift an image relative to the binding edge m Image shift has basically the same function However Image shift also allows you to move the image vertically This gives you more freedom in moving the image exactly to the desired position NOTE By default the values of the front side and the back side are linked To define different values for each side
306. rtens the job name when the job name is too long to display fully Operator panel settings Adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen of the operator panel Shut down system Shut down the printer and the controller in a controlled way The advanced section displays the following buttons m Local key operator settings Get direct access to a number of important key operator settings in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to yourneeds 319 Work with the workflow profiles Work with the workflow profiles Introduction The machine is used in different printing environments Each environment requires other settings to optimize the workflow or to meet your personal workflow preferences The machine contains a number of default workflow profiles to help you optimize your workflow The default workflow profiles are combinations of frequently used settings for print jobs Receive Print and Output However the workflow profiles cannot cover all the possible workflows you may need Therefore you can also define the settings indi vidually custom workflow This section makes recommendations about when to use which workflow profile Further more this section describes the settings and the effects of the settings NOTE The Workflow profile button in the Setup section of the System view displays the name of the selected workflow profile
307. s Left Top Right Bottom Chapter 6 Print jobs 113 Description of the print job settings Output settings Folding Setting Values Description Folding ay Here you can define the folding method for the prints None Half fold CH Tri fold in Tri fold out a Parallel fold 114 Chapter 6 Print jobs Description of the print job settings Setting Output settings Binding Setting Binding Values Z fold large sheets only Print method Values TF 1 staple 2 staples Saddle stitching Description Use the Print method option to define on which side to print a Print inside m Print outside Check the preview for the result of the selection Description Here you can define the required number of staples Furthermore you can define where you want the sta ples with the Location option The available locations for one staple Top left Top right Bottom left a Bottom right The available locations for two staples m Left edge Top edge Bottom edge a Right edge Check the preview for the result of the selection Chapter 6 Print jobs 115 Description of the print job settings Output settings Trimming Setting Values Trimming Description Trim size
308. s Colour pre sets Input profiles Output profiles Spot colours x a Add Edit Delete Name Description Inuse F Office documents suitable for RGB workflows I Photographic content suitable for photographic content Yes 140 The Color pre sets window Chapter 3 Operating concept Maintain the Color pre sets iR ADV C9000S PRO series PRISMAsync Controller Add Edit Delete Name D office documents I Photographic content Colour Preferences 3 From the toolbar select the required option to maintain the Color pre sets Configuration Name Description DeviceRGB input profile DeviceRGB rendering intent Overrule RGB profile sRGB Perceptual r DeviceCMYK input profile DeviceCMYK rendering intent Overrule CMYK profile FOGRA39_Coated z Relative colourimetric z r Halftone for graphics images Halftone for text Print in black amp white PDF overprint simulation Spot colour matching PDF X output intent 141 The Add color pre set window Chapter 3 Operating concept Log out Help 71 Maintain the Input profiles Maintain the Input profiles Introduction An input profile defines a reference color workspace for the color data of the objects in the document An input profile is used to define colors in a device independent way Maintain the Input profiles 1 From the navigation bar se
309. s PUSH on both sides of the staple case 4 Remove the staple case by pulling it out Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 309 Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit 5 Insert the new staple case O IMPORTANT Make sure that you pull the seal straight out If you pull it out at an angle it may tear 7 Close the staple case cover 8 Gently push the staple case into the stapler unit until it is securely in place 310 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit Always make sure to insert the staple case as far as it can go A CAUTION When closing the front cover of the finisher be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 311 Replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit Replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit Introduction This section describes how to replace the staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit of Booklet Finisher A1 O IMPORTANT m Use only staple cartridges intended for use in this machine See Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit on page 33 m Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine When an optional unit s cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge discard the punch waste discard the trim waste or clear paper o
310. s and contrast of the LCD panel Shut down the printer View the content of the Media catalogue or add temporary media to the Media cat alogue m Start maintenance calibration and media registration a Adjust the CMYK curve manually The dashboard displays information about the system status such as m Information about the current printing process m Information about operator intervention that is required soon Information about errors Information about the status of the toner reservoir and staple cartridges Continue the job when the status is On hold Chapter 2 Main parts The operator panel Component Function Status LED Displays the status of the system a Red The machine has stopped for example because a required media type is not avail able or an error has occurred Operator attention is required now Orange The machine will stop soon for example because more paper is required Operator attention is required soon The orange light illuminates when the machine reaches the warning time The warning time is a time you can set to deter mine when the orange light must illumi nate You can set the warning time in the System view of the operator panel Green The machine is busy printing The ma chine can print longer than the set warning time Operator attention is not required No color The machine is idle There are no jobs scheduled for printing mOverview of the machin
311. s the first required or most important message Chapter 4 Operator panel views 85 The Schedule view The Schedule view Introduction The Schedule is your daily planning board for print jobs The Schedule helps you to keep the machine running This section shows and describes the main parts of the Schedule NOTE The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are only valid for document printing For streaming jobs 4 all the bars remain grey until the paper trays are empty or the output locations are full Then the machine stops and the bars become red Furthermore the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets The Schedule view Printing EE Required media Normal A4 A4 D 80 gm white Normal A4 44D 80 ot Bue 5 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 4hours 8 hours Required output locations X stacker stapler upper tray D Schedule Jobs Trays Een System 154 The Schedule view 86 Chapter 4 Operator panel views The Jobs view The Jobs view Introduction The Jobs view enables you to access all functions to print copy and scan your documents From the left side of the Jobs view you can access the following sections a The Queues section The Queues section enables you to manage print jobs in
312. scribes the attributes you can define The selection of automated workflows is handled when the job is sent over LPR via the name of the automated workflow of the job ticket Once the job is sent to a specified automated workflow on the printer you cannot move the job to another workflow The operator panel does not display the various automated workflows However jobs can get a label that you can use as a selection criterion for further processing and production The use of automated workflows has for example the following advantages m The print workflow is automated even more which improves the productivity m The programming of individual jobs is eliminated which optimizes the job throughput m You can more easily distinguish prioritize and produce jobs in different automated workflows with different properties using less operator involvement m You can easily assign legacy applications without job tickets to specific job profiles You can define whether or not the settings of a job ticket overrule the settings of an automated workflow in the Settings Editor Attributes It is not compulsory to define all the settings When you put a check mark in front of a setting that setting and its values become enabled Refer to the Settings Editor to get an overview of the settings Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 331 Introduction to automated workflows wAdd an automated workflow on page 333 mEdit an
313. section Introduction The System view gives access to system information the system setup and media infor mation This section gives an overview of the Setup section in the System view Introduction to the Setup section Fz E A Receive Print a Output is ii D fe Print jobs to Scheduled jobs Copy jobs to Scheduled jobs Confirm start of job Check first set Jobs offset stacked Workflow profile Custom Language English US Local key operator settings gt Warning time 10 minutes Job name truncation 000K YYYYYYYYYYY Operator panel settings Shut down system e A Schedule Jobs Trays amp System The items of the Setup section The workflow section at the top of the operator panel displays the main settings of the current workflow profile The operator panel section displays the following buttons 318 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Introduction to the Setup section Workflow profile Select a workflow profile or manually define the settings that match your needs Language Change the language of the operator panel Warning time Define the moment when the system warns you about an action that is required soon for example 10 minutes in advance The warning is displayed in the dashboard and indicated through the operator attention light Job name truncation Define the way the system sho
314. seseeeeereeeeeeseeees 328 System settings Dat and time sieieceriasditiacsdianincns 328 System of measurement cssseseeeeeeeeeeeeenees 328 Time ZONE rne R ET 328 System view Media section isisiciescccasss cee cictveasloned ences 144 Overview 05 Setup section T Tab paper load Esn EAE Paper tray TCP P Technology Pech OlO gy sor ANEA 370 Temporary media Temporary media wcrc 146 148 Test TCP IP connection Test TCP IP connection ccccccsecseeseeeesees 328 Ticket DiCKGt ges hesseages Genesis sds adiderien dad Heactateeieddiesievae s 124 454 TIFF E E EE NE AA E 214 Time zone Time ZOnE rea E A ERAR 328 To top LOMO pree diedansciees 120 Toner TOMER EEEE E 301 Toner cartridge Tomer Cattrid ge ssena 301 toner cartridge SUOLE TOMEL ini d scesecesviss sastasiseescdieessebacseheviese 235 Toner counter Tomer Counter cccsccsessccessccesssevessceeseseenes 358 Toner icons Toner Icons oiin rna KNER 299 Toner indicator Status bit earannan e a 301 Toner ICON ssesssriecreristissrmeisriirissisiseeriiess 301 Transparencies Transparencies nna a E aE 285 Trays view Load media oserei raneren 142 OWE VIEW esis cdescs nan a aa E e 89 139 Tri fold in Tatold Im aeree E E 52 Tri fold out Trifold OUt o ccccecceccesscsecsseessecsseessecseeeseeesees 52 Trim waste Remove aa ONENEN 296 Trim waste tray Trim waste Way si scecvseseesstdsastecseeied siosisnisvterics 33 Trimming
315. set day COUNTELS sirisser isseisicri iniii 357 Resolution SCAN JOD wcities didinanrnauamiiinaias 222 Restore Default workflow ccccecceeetseeeseteeeeteeeeees 336 S Saddle finisher Saddle fitishet sssessasuseestesesssersesestseass ess sevees 33 Save a custom template Save a custom template cccscseeseeeeeeeeees 207 Save the datadump file Save the datadump file wees 328 Save the zipped log file Save the zipped log file wees 328 Scan function Scan job PHF DaSiCed ves ne no EAE Adjust nape sssini irrista AUGE iaeiaiai ioirik Automated settings si Background suppression Black and white 006 Calota mannna A AR Combined job File type Grayscale Margin erase i Media Size ccccccccsccsssesseessesssessseessessssssseesees 222 Original ype snene n nai 219 Res luti N siisii erisir ins 222 ITA AOA E AE E E TE E EAN E 220 Subset job 0 229 Types of settings 216 TOON arae castes tenn issesesn ak eee A 222 Scan jobs Access other functions cccscsessessesseseeseeeee 203 Minimize ZOOM oe Scan quality Sean quality ananiona 212 Scan to file Scamto file sssaaa 227 Scan to USB Scan to USB persere 228 Schedule view Introduction c ccccccccecscesscessessecsscesseesseseeeeaes 133 Jobs pane a Load media size ci discatiadsssdeseddedeceveesecieiitietsees 137 Media toolbar cccccccssesseesssesecesseeseesseeeseees 135 Output locations pane occ 135 OVE
316. several times and align the edges to facilitate feeding Also you should always fan paper that has just been removed from a newly opened paper package h In 3 Load the paper stack into the inserter Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 275 Load the media into the inserter A CAUTION Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark at the back of the paper supply tray NOTE m You cannot make copies or prints on paper that is loaded into the document in sertion unit m You can load the following media into the trays of the inserter 330 x 483 mm 320 x 450 mm SRA3 305 x 457 mm A3 B4 A4 A4R Bs B5R and custom size 182 0 x 182 0 mm to 330 2 x 487 7 mm into the trays of the inserter 13 x 19 12 5 8 x 1711 16 12 x 18 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR EXEC and custom size 7 1 8 x 7 1 8 to 13 x 19 1 4 A maximum of 200 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 lb bond can be loaded into the trays of the inserter m Ifyou want to load paper into the upper tray Load the paper face up m Ifyou want to load paper into the lower tray Load the paper face up 276 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the inserter m Close the tray cover mLoading tab paper on page 287 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 277 Load the media into the special feeder multipurpose tray Load the me
317. shboard and in the System view The icons in the following table indicate the status of the toner reservoir This section gives an overview of the possible toner statuses Furthermore this section describes how to check the status in the System view The colors of the toner icons The toner icons Toner icon Description A blue toner icon indicates that the toner reservoir is sufficiently filled Do not add toner An orange toner icon indicates that toner reservoir is filled less than 25 The printer can print another 600 sheets You must replace the toner cartridge as soon as possible A red toner icon indicates that the toner reservoir is empty The printing stops You must replace the toner cartridge to continue the printing Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 299 Check the status of the toner reservoir and waste toner container Illustration Printing tem Stacker stapler Upper tray stapler 1 0 staples used since last refill Open the black oper Gover ms Upper tray stapler 2 O staples used since last refill Lower tray stapler 1 O staples used since last refil Toner Cyan Full Lower tray stapler 2 0 staples used since last refill Ihe cyan toner cover A Booklet tray stapler 1 O staples used since last refill fe Toner Magenta Full Booklet tray stapler 2 O staples used since last refil 0 genta toner cover 4a amp Toner Yellow Ful Ope w toner cover za Replace the
318. sisi Shift the margin asaso cnayssi LOOP E Job name Copy Job noora a 192 Print JOD seissesscsscdscsscosssscessdeeseseiuoes sessczeaseseaees 116 Truncate sre n GRO 326 Job settings Copy job Hotfolder Index Print jo Diusir iseseisana 104 Job status Job Statins sipsien 87 Job status icons Job Status ICONS iiia iiini 87 Job ticket Job ticket scscsscssussctiessctcancesseucacaneseacencneatavenys 124 Jobs view OVENIEW rererere tinea KARESE ETEL KERSEN 87 Jobs with available media Jobs with available media ccceceeseeeeeees 131 Jobs with label Jobs with label sssssessesesesesesnsesssesesesesssssseses 131 JPEG TPO stisieorssutodiadedmetumrtennnaunian 214 K Key operator settings Key operator settings ssierieseestesere siis 328 L Label Tabel scccswesdscscsctasdnstsavsavscreavaicsnesessossavansesseneys 131 Layout Copy JO Dierre 180 Link speed and connection type Link speed and connection type 0000 328 Load the media Bulk paper module s ctevsisissiscsscccorseieenees 257 TSETERE 272 Integrated paper tray s sesessessissessresrerresesse 237 Paper mod le senaia 245 Schedule view srren aE E 137 Special feeders nsun nnii nnne 278 Trays VIEW Gra RRE AE ERN 142 Loading tab paper Loading tab papers s ciscsevessseseiescissesieszsnasys 287 Logging Printing the Configuration Report 4 328 Save the datadump file wees 328 Save the zipped log file wees 328 M MAC address MAC address 05
319. size 8 1 4 x 11 to 11 3 4 x 19 1 4 or custom size 11 3 4 x 11 to 13 x 19 1 4 m The accuracy of folds created with saddle stitching may vary depending on the paper type and the number of sheets Chapter 2 Main parts Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit Punching Punching allows you to punch holes into printed sheets The hole punched areas are shown in the illustration below Glass plate Feeder BC r Hole E Hole Punched D Punched Area Area te Hole Hole Punched D Punched Area Area Lo I The distance between the punch holes is shown in the illustration below Chapter 2 Main parts 41 Stacker stapler and integrated punch unit 80 mm 80 mm 80 mm 80 mm 21mm 70 mm 21 mm lt gt KK be xs e ee 86 90 Puncher Unit BG1 2 holes Puncher Unit BG1 4 holes Puncher Unit BH1 444 4114 2 31 108 mm 108 mm 70 mm e Puncher Unit BF1 O IMPORTANT You cannot punch holes into the following paper types Heavy 4 257 to 300 g m 100 lb cover to 110 lb cover 1 sided coated 4 257 to 300 g m 100 lb cover to 110 lb cover 2 sided coated 4 257 to 300 g m 100 lb cover to
320. sseessseeseseneeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeess 359 Auto color mismatch correction cccccssccccceeeeeceeeeeeeessssesssseeseees 360 CAND Rat lOMesicsuitiede dese cecebtetanaweievecdeddvcanatsebiastvbabebes a aaa aa a baaa iS a 361 Introduction to printer Cali DratiOn ccccsccccceceeeeeeeesseeesssesssseesees 361 Calibrate the printer 1 Shading Correction eeceeeeeeeeeeeeee 362 Calibrate the printer 2 Auto gradation adjustment 364 Calibrate the controller 3 Media family calibration 366 Adjust the CMYK calibration curve manuall ceceeeeeeeeeees 368 Chapter 12 SPOECHICATIONSS 555 65cecs0 lsc sheds dc cen cccccd aaae aaa aeaa aiani ai KNEG 369 DDE CITICATI ONS asaan aA A 370 Chapter 13 Third party SOftWANE eccceeceee eee eeeee cece eee eeeeeeeeeteeacaeeeeeeeesaaaeseeseeeeeeaaeees 391 Third Party SORWarC scscssssetsccekeccenteticdedasssantevseuessedsesdeeaeddssntcestvandeeeisdushs 392 The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions cccccceeseeeeeeees 394 The Apache Software License Version 1 1 scceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 396 Bouncy Castle LICENS issis aiaiai 397 d Mp restor Ginac aaa aa a aaa aa a E aaa aia 398 MIT Ciee Errea aaa aa a aae aai ae aaO a a aa s iii 400 FONTCON TIO assenso been cae ee ee de eene S E E E eee 401 The FreeType Project LICENSE cssssssesessseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeesees 402 J2ME desc
321. ssie does ieii airosa 211 Output profile Media tab sisssdssscaiscossies seoadsorstodsvsrstorseatarsessid 66 Output profiles Output profiles sic scsesescsiiaeceedtseretennccteee 73 P Page range Print a part of a job sssssssssssssssesissssrissrssrsseee 116 Print all pages Paper Deck Unit A1 Paper Deck Unit A1 ssesssssessissessississisrrssresresess 21 Paper Deck A1 Paper Deck Ai sisssicoceccsscsscescvscescascsvtstessseresctss 19 Paper Folding Unit G1 Paper Folding Unit G1 ween 52 Paper jams Paper jams sccradennan nn 359 Paper module Paper module ss iyscsesssvexsestebsisestdcoretdesc sisters 19 Adjust for media size o cccscceseeseeeseeeeseees 252 Lad pedia sesen 245 Paper stock Paper stook esisiini iais 234 Paper storage Paper StOrAge sesinin seiis 234 Paper tray Paper tay sisesiisieiniseissse siess siini iia 19 Adjust for media size s iisiseiiiinsrsii iss 243 Change paper size ismer in 243 Tab paper ssesssesssssessisscvessscdestsesidessstssapsdssseszes 289 Paper tray icons Paper tray ICONS ssssscscestesccsccosssssseseossatceesieests 140 POD Deck Lite A1 POD Deck Lite A1 sses 21 POD deck lite A1 change paper size wis assssiesssssciaspesuestassansavosivess 263 Postponed copying Postponed copying ccceeeseeseseseteeeeeeees 210 Power modes Power TOMES iscissi nesrin 94 Power switch Power SWITCH scbecescssssssseseovendescossieeseseoeeieraesere 94 Primary DNS suffix Primary DINS Sufix nean 328
322. stop Stop after Press the but Description ton A set one time The printer stops when the currently printed set of the active print job amp is completed It depends on the set size and the moment you press the Stop button when the printer will stop For example when you have a large set of 1 000 pages and you press the Stop button after the first page the printing will continue for a couple of minutes NOTE When you press the Stop button one time the dashboard will immediately display a Resume button with a vertical orange bar However the printing continues until the current set is completed You must touch the Resume button to resume printing The printer stops when the printer buffer is empty as soon as possible The buffer can contain up to 50 pages Because A page E two times the printer stops when the buffer is empty it is possible that the last printed set is not complete NOTE When you press the Stop button two times the dashboard will immediately display a Resume button with a vertical red bar However the printing continues until the buffer is empty You must touch the Resume button to resume printing 126 Chapter 6 Print jobs Stop the printer Stop after Press the but Description ton A job Stop after job In Jobs gt Queues gt Scheduled jobs you must select the job after which the printer must stop
323. t the deck base plate that matches the new paper size into the paper deck IMPORTANT m Always use the deck base plate when loading paper into the paper deck If you load paper without setting the deck base plate the loaded paper may hang over the lifter and a paper jam may occur m Never place the deck base plate into the empty part of the paper deck Doing so may lead to a printer malfunction Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 269 Adjust the media size for the bulk paper module 16 Place the paper size sheet that matches the new paper size into the paper deck O IMPORTANT Never place the paper size sheet into the empty part of the pod deck lite Doing so may lead to a printer malfunction 17 Load the paper stack into the paper deck then lower the feeding support roller A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper O IMPORTANT m To load paper larger than A4 LTR first close the pod deck lite to raise the inside lifter open the pod deck lite then load the paper If you try to load paper larger then A4 LTR when the inside lifter is at its lowest position the paper may not be loaded properly and paper jams may occur m Never place paper or any other items into the empty part of the pod deck lite Doing so may lead to a printer malfunction 270 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Adjust the me
324. t tray When you load and assign the media via the Assign button in the Trays view you must assign the loaded media to the corresponding paper tray manually A CAUTION When loading paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 245 Load the media into the paper module O IMPORTANT m Ifthe printer is in Sleep mode you may not be able to open the paper trays even when pressing the Open buttons In this case press the Sleep Mode key on the operator panel to reactivate the printer then press the Open button on the paper tray you want to open m Ifyou need to lift the lifter e g if you drop objects into the paper tray do not lift the lifter more than 50 mm 2 or diagonally as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the printer m Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the paper tray next to the paper stack Doing so may damage the printer m A screen prompting you to load paper also appears if the selected paper tray is not fully inserted into the machine Make sure that the paper tray is properly in place m You can load custom size paper if both paper sides are between 182 0 mm 7 1 8 and 487 7 mm 19 1 4 in length and between 139 7 mm 512 and 330 2 mm 13 in width You cannot load custom size paper if either one of the sides is smaller or larger than the paper sizes that can be loaded m Do not load the foll
325. tack into the paper deck Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 259 Load the media into the bulk paper modules Make sure that the inside lifter has lowered before loading paper even out the edges of the paper stack and stack the paper neatly against the inner paper guide 388 Paper Deck Lite A1 O IMPORTANT m Do not load paper into the paper deck that has previously been printed on as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the printer Always use the stack bypass to feed paper when you want to print on the back of a sheet of paper that already has something printed on its front 2nd side of 2 sided print m Make sure that the size change plate is properly aligned with the marks for the desired paper size If the size change plate is not properly aligned the paper deck may become damaged m Paper that has been rolled or curled must be straightened before loading it into the paper deck m Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark on the inside of the paper deck 260 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the bulk paper modules NOTE Load the paper stack in stages adding approximately 600 sheets of paper 64 g m 17 lb bond or 550 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 lb bond at a time If the paper deck can accommodate more paper the lifter will descend m Hot air blown by the fan may warm the inner size
326. tart maintenance From the maintenance section you can start the maintenance and calibration proce dures m Go to the service mode 344 Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration Introduction to the Maintenance section The maintenance section EA Maintenance Counters Biling cour 100 TL_SYSTEM_COUNTERS_CANON_100 7st 730 101 Total1 779 158 102 Total2 307 786 1403 Total Large 835 s4 104 Total Small 863 842 105 Total Full Color 1 sn 870 106 Total Full Color 2 919 898 107 TL_SYSTEM_COUNTERS_CANON_107 s47 926 Reset day counters fen Jobs Trays By System Chapter 11 Maintenance and calibration 345 Introduction Routine cleaning Introduction Introduction If the original is not copied clearly clean the following parts of the printer For high quality printouts we recommend cleaning these parts once or twice a month Glass plate Feeder and the underside of the feeder Rollers Wires Drums Control panel Warnings A WARNING m When cleaning the printer first turn OFF the main power switch then dis connect the power cord Failure to follow these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock Do not use alcohol benzene paint thinner or other solvents for cleaning Doing so may result in damage to the plastic parts m Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly and clean the area around the base of the p
327. tcneseessicesdndcccseceassaneuetietdesdastan ivechvshsbbuveadabdi ouecscdedasdallineanavesdacesecd 405 WD PING Pn aE E E E destetenenee sphdadeleveebestielipebeiluedoesedeenteae 406 Adobe Flash Player in NetFront eesssssssesessseenrssssnnnnssssssnnnnnsernnnnnnnne 408 The BSD LIC NS vcisieeiessessecticceevaveceieiadeis annia aaa a iaaa 410 MSTILIB E E T T 416 Java Servlet Implementation Classes Version 2 1 1 Binary Code Li CONSE e aana E E r A E a a E a 418 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 0 cccseeceeeessssseeeeeessssssseeeeeeeees 419 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE ccccceccesssssseeeeeeeeeees 426 Eclipse Public License V 1 0 o ceeceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeaaae 436 COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 cccccssssssseeeeessssseeeeeeseees 441 Chapter 1 Preface Trademarks Trademarks List of trademarks 8 Adobe Acrobat Reader and Distiller are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor porated PostScript 3 is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Products in this publication are referred to by their general trade names In most if not all cases these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective co
328. ted by the authors David Turner Robert Wil helm and Werner Lemberg as the FreeType Project be they named as alpha beta or final release You refers to the licensee or person using the project where using is a generic term including compiling the project s source code as well as linking it to form a program or executable This program is referred to as a program using the FreeType engine This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project including all source code binaries and documentation unless otherwise stated in the file in its original unmodified form as distributed in the original archive If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license you must contact us to verify this The FreeType Project is copyright C 1996 2000 by David Turner Robert Wilhelm and Werner Lemberg All rights reserved except as specified below 1 No Warranty THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICU LAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT 2 Redistribution This license grants a worldwide royalty free perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use execute perform compile display copy cr
329. ted workflow 1 Go to Workflow gt Automated workflows 2 Put a check mark in front of the workflow you want to edit 3 Click the Edit button A pop up window displays the attributes you can specify for your workflow 4 Change the attributes Click Ok M mIntroduction to automated workflows on page 331 wAdd an automated workflow on page 333 mDelete an automated workflow on page 335 mRestore the factory default workflow on page 336 334 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs Delete an automated workflow Delete an automated workflow Introduction When you no longer need a certain automated workflow you can delete that workflow NOTE You cannot delete the factory default automated workflow How to delete an automated workflow 1 Go to Workflow gt Automated workflows 2 Puta check mark in front of the workflow you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button 4 Click Ok mIntroduction to automated workflows on page 331 wAdd an automated workflow on page 333 wEdit an automated workflow on page 334 mRestore the factory default workflow on page 336 Chapter 10 Adapt printer settings to your needs 335 Restore the factory default workflow Restore the factory default workflow Introduction You can restore the factory default automated workflow This has the following conse quences m All the automated workflows you added will be remove
330. tely 320 W Professional Puncher C1 Replaceable A4 die sets for Professional Puncher B1 388 Specification Replaceable punch die sets A4 LTR Value EUR 20 hole Plastic Comb 21 hole Plastic Comb 23 hole round Twin Loop 23 hole square Twin Loop 34 hole square Twin Loop 34 hole round Twin Loop 47 hole Color Coil 12 hole Velo Bind 4 hole Loose Leaf 34 hole Pro Click 2 hole Loose Leaf 4 hole Loose Leaf Swedish 2 hole 6 5 mm Loose Leaf 4 hole 6 5 mm Loose Leaf 3 hole Loose Leaf US Loose Leaf 3 Hole 5 Hole Velo Bind 11 hole Plastic Comb 19 hole Twin Loop 21 hole 32 hole ProClick 32 Hole Color Coil 44 hole Plastic Comb 19 hole High Durability Color Coil 44 hole High Durability Loose Leaf 3 Hole High Durability Paper weight 75 216 g m 20 lb bond 80 lb cover uncoated 120 216 g m 32 lb bond 80 lb cover coated For Pro Click EU 34 hole 120 176 g m 32 lb bond 65 lb cover coated Life time 500 000 sheets or more Chapter 12 Specifications Specifications Copy tray Specification Value Description Output tray for straight output stacking only no offset stacking Paper weight As defined for main engine Paper size As defined for main engine 1 sided printed output 50 sheets 80 gsm 22 lb Bond Tray capacity 2 sided printed output 100 sheets 80 gsm 22 lb Bond Dimensions 420 x 382 x 267 mm 19 2 x 15
331. tem Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you dis tribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things Chapter 13 Third party software 431 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 432 m a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above m b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it isa work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not requi
332. tent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circum stance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances Chapter 13 Third party software GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application
333. that are available in the Media catalog List of temporary media To catalog button Display the temporary media that are currently available on the system Add temporary media to the media catalog 144 Chapter 6 Print jobs Introduction to the Media section Num Item Function ber T AT a 4 Registration button Perform a media registration to position the image at the exact position of the media mDescription of the Trays view on page 139 wAdd temporary media to the Media catalog on page 148 Chapter 6 Print jobs 145 Introduction to the media handling Introduction to the media handling Introduction The machine supports a wide range of media including tabs and inserts The supported media sizes range from 203 mm x 203 mm minimum to 305 mm x 457 mm maximum The supported media weights range from 33 202 lb bond for media that are recommend ed by the manufacturer and 40 135 lb bond for other media This section describes the following Media handling in general m The Media catalog Temporary media General introduction to the media handling All the print jobs require media that you can assign to the paper trays via the operator panel The print jobs can require media that are included in the Media catalog However the print jobs can also require media that are not included in the Media catalog These media become temporary media on the
334. the documents first and sort or staple them later By using the bundle function you can determine the order of the documents before printing and print all documents in the correct order in only 1 print job Important information about the bundle function m You can only bundle print jobs that are currently in the list of Waiting jobs m You can change a number of settings for the bundled job via the Properties window By default the number of sets for a bundled job is 1 So before printing you must first indicate the required number of sets see m When you stop a job after a set the printing stops after 1 copy of the complete bundle m The jobs in a bundle are accounted separately under the account ID of the original jobs m All the jobs in the bundle must have the same output location Otherwise the operator panel displays a warning message To continue you must first split the bundled job then change the individual job settings and finally bundle the jobs again Main actions on the bundle function The table below describes the main actions you can carry out with regard to the bundle function Main bundle functions Main actions Description Bundle When you touch Bundle after selecting 2 or more jobs a new job is created that contains the original jobs The new job is added to the bottom of the list of Waiting jobs The original jobs are removed from the list The new job gets a new name that is based o
335. the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position The inside lifter automatically rises and prepares the paper tray for printing When returning the paper tray to its original position be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury 250 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Load the media into the paper module O IMPORTANT You will not be able to make copies or print if you load paper that exceeds the loading limit or if the paper tray is not completely pushed into the machine NOTE If paper runs out while copying or printing load a new paper stack then follow the instructions on the touch panel display The machine automatically restarts and produces the remaining copies or prints mAdjust the media size for the paper module on page 252 mLoading transparencies on page 285 mLoading tab paper on page 287 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 251 Adjust the media size for the paper module Adjust the media size for the paper module Introduction This section explains how to change the paper size in the optional Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 Adjust the media size for paper module 1 Press the button on the paper deck that you want to adjust and pull out the paper deck until it stops Slide the paper holder plate until it does not catch onto the paper you are setting then remove all the remaining paper It may t
336. the staple icon The colors of the staple icon Description Staple icon A blue staple icon indicates that all the staple cartridges contain Eaa sufficient staples r An orange staple icon indicates that one of the staple cartridges Ta is almost empty A red staple icon indicates that one of the staple cartridges is empty The printer stops when a job requires staples from the empty staple cartridge 306 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Check the status of the staple cartridges Illustration myJob Toner Black Trimmer waste box Toner Cyan Toner Magenta Toner Yellow Status Waste toner Stapler waste box Absert Puncher waste box Absent Lower tray stapler 0 staples used since last refill Booklet tray stapler 0 staples used since last refill Booklet tray stapler O staples used since last refill Puncher waste box schedule Jobs I Trays By system 511 The location of the staple icons right side of the main window How to check the status of the staple cartridges 1 Check the staple icon in the dashboard 2 When the staple icon is orange or red go to the Printer section of the System view to check which staple cartridge must be refilled mThe dashboard on page 84 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 307 Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit Int
337. this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distri bution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally
338. touch t The changes you make are valid for the whole document not only for the current page How to shift the margin and the image 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 164 Nan fw Touch the job you want to change NOTE You can only change the settings of the active print job amp after you stopped the printer press the Stop button two times Touch Properties or touch the job two times to open the Properties window Touch the Shift button Make the required changes Press OK Press OK Chapter 6 Print jobs Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout mShift the image roughly to create binding space on page 163 Chapter 6 Print jobs 165 Change the print delivery settings Change the print delivery settings Introduction Usually the print delivery settings have been defined in the printer driver Overview of the print delivery settings Setting Description Output location Change the output location for the job The list shows all the output locations that are available for your system Make sure there is a match between the selected output location and the job requirements For example when a job requires staples you must select an output location that allows stapling Change the sorting method of the prints You can select sort By page or By set
339. treaming job Indicates a proof print The job settings are overruled by the PRISMAsync con troller settings Indicates an RIP error mDescription of the print job settings on page 104 mIntroduction to the copy function on page 170 mDescription of the copy job settings on page 172 mIntroduction to the scan function on page 214 mDescription of the scan job settings on page 216 88 Chapter 4 Operator panel views The Trays view The Trays view Introduction The Trays view has the following functions a Display the current content and filling level of the paper trays m Change the media that is currently assigned to a paper tray m Assign media to a paper tray Unassign media from a paper tray Illustration A4insert a4 D insert 80 gin White Adinsert 4D insert 80 gin White Normal A3 A3 D 80 gm7 white 2 l 1 i Oce Red Normal A4 6 aD 20 aD 6 Custom 20x30 gin Wee gin Vite 200 x 300 mm 80 gine J white 3 Normal A4 A4 D 80 gin White 7 J 10x7 4 Normal Letter 17 8 x 254 mm 80 ge Letter 8 5x11 D 80 gin white ome B Schedule A Jobs Trays can System 166 Configuration example mDescription of the Trays view on page 139 Chapter 4 Operator panel views 89 The System
340. ttings File settings Type Setting Description Select the required format TIF Select the TIFF Single Page format when you require single pages in a general format a single page compat ible with a range of graphical applications i Select the TIFF Multi Page format when you require multiple pages in a general format compatible with a range of graphical applications IPG Select the JPEG format when you require a general format compatible with a range of graphical applica tions PDF Select the PDF format when you require a format compatible with the Acrobat applications A PDF file is a file with compressed graphics and text This for mat matches all print systems and is common in the Internet environment r Define the compression factor to reduce the file size Compres sion NOTE A higher compression factor results in a scan with lower quality P Quality Define the quality factor to reduce the file size NOTE A higher quality factor results in a scan with a larger file size P Chapter 8 Scan jobs 221 Description of the scan job settings File settings Resolution Setting Values Description Resolution Select a value from the list from 150 dpi lowest res olution to 600 dpi highest resolution To give you an indication of what value to choose m Select 150 d
341. uired Integrated paper trays The main unit contains paper trays holding the media that will be print ed on Main unit The engine module consists of com ponents 2 7 Optional paper modules Input options Component Function Paper module The additional paper module has Multi Drawer Paper Deck A1 paper trays that contain the media that will be printed Chapter 2 Main parts 17 Overview of the machine configuration Component Function 10 Bulk paper module The bulk paper module contains the POD Deck Lite A1 media that will be printed The bulk paper module contains 1 tray Bulk paper module The bulk paper module contains the Paper Deck Unit A1 media that will be printed The bulk paper module contains 1 tray Optional finishing equipment Output options Component Function Inserter The inserter feeds cover sheets sepa Document Insertion Unit H1 rator sheets or preprinted colored sheets for printed documents and booklets Puncher Use the puncher to punch holes into Professional Puncher C1 and prints Punchers allow you to change Professional Puncher Integration die sets Unit B1 Folder The folder is used to fold prints in Paper Folding Unit G1 different ways Stacker stapler The stacker stapler offers the follow Booklet Finisher A1 Punch ing functionality Unit BG1 BH1 BF1 and Inner Stack prints Booklet Tri
342. use of the Program the Contributor who includes the Program in a commer cial product offering should do so in a manner which does not create potential liability for other Contributors Therefore ifa Contributor includes the Program in a commercial product offering such Contributor Commercial Contributor hereby agrees to defend and indemnify every other Contributor Indemnified Contributor against any losses damages and costs collectively Losses arising from claims lawsuits and other legal actions brought by a third party against the Indemnified Contributor to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of such Commercial Contributor in connection with its distribu tion of the Program in a commercial product offering The obligations in this section do not apply to any claims or Losses relating to any actual or alleged intellectual property infringement In order to qualify an Indemnified Contributor must a promptly notify the Commercial Contributor in writing of such claim and b allow the Commercial Contributor to control and cooperate with the Commercial Contributor in the defense and any related settlement negotiations The Indemnified Contributor may participate in any such claim at its own expense For example a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering Product X That Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor If that Commercial Contributor then makes performance claims or offers warranties rel
343. ust reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBU TORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUP TION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARIS ING IN ANY WAY Chapter 13 Third party software dump restore OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSI BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Chapter 13 Third party software 399 MIT License MIT License 400 Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Copyright c 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 Expat maintainers Permission is h
344. utions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Cisco Inc Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEV ER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CON TRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 7 Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG copyright notice BSD Copyright c Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG 2003
345. ver to open automatically then pull the toner cartridge out of the toner supply port Black Toner Cartridge Cyan Magenta or Yellow Toner Cartridge 302 Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples Replace the toner cartridge A WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames as this may cause toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite resulting in burns or a fire O IMPORTANT Do not open the internal cover by force doing so may damage the printer 5 Hold the new toner cartridge in your hands as shown below and gently tilt it up and down 10 times O IMPORTANT Never touch the tip of the toner cartridge or subject it to shock by hitting it 6 Twist the protective cap of the new toner cartridge in the direction of the arrow to remove it Chapter 9 Paper toner and staples 303 Replace the toner cartridge O IMPORTANT Never touch the tip of the toner cartridge or subject it to shock by hitting it Doing so may cause the toner cartridge to leak Ve 7 Push the new toner cartridge in as far as possible oA Black Toner Cartridge Cyan Magenta or Yellow Toner Cartridge O IMPORTANT When replacing toner cartridges make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color of the label on the internal cover 8 Close the internal cover B
346. vers or back covers are required the settings are usually set in the printer driver for example However you can view and change the settings for the covers via the operator panel You can change the following settings for both the front cover and the back cover sepa rately m Enable or disable the use of a cover m Select the desired media from the Media catalog m Indicate whether the cover must be left empty or printed 1 sided and or 2 sided How to change the settings for covers 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job of which you want to change the cover settings NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job amp Touch Properties or touch the job 2x to open the Properties window Touch the Cover button Make the required changes Press OK Press OK Nan fw 162 Chapter 6 Print jobs Shift the image roughly to create binding space Shift the image roughly to create binding space Introduction If you want to create space for staples or punch holes for example you can use the Align function The preview in the right hand pane of the operator panel displays the conse quences of your changes You can also shift the image or margin more precisely How to change the alignment 1 Touch Jobs gt Waiting jobs 2 Touch the job you want to change NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job amp Touch P
347. ws the settings you can define for the print job 104 Chapter 6 Print jobs Description of the print job settings Number Pane sid Pane Description Job The Job pane shows the generic settings you can define for the whole job Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output Furthermore this pane gives access to the templates 5 Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can carry out Output settings 1 or 2 sided Setting Values Description 1 or 2 sid The automatically set value for this setting ed The output contains an image on 1 side The output contains an image on both sides Chapter 6 Print jobs 105 Description of the print job settings Output settings Binding edge Setting Values Description Binding The automatically set value for this setting edge lV Auto The output has a vertical format height gt width The binding edge is at the left hand side When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form Portrait left Portrait top The output has a vertical format height gt width The binding edge of the print is at the top When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form This means that every back of a 2 sided print is upside down compared to the f
348. y software 407 Adobe Flash Player in NetFront Adobe Flash Player in NetFront Terms and Conditions 408 Please use the Web Access Software hereinafter referred to as the Software under the terms and conditions below Terms and conditions for use of the Software m You may use the Software only on the Canon product specified when acquiring a Li cense Access Number hereinafter referred to as the Hardware and you may not use the Software on any device other than the Hardware The Software may not be shared installed or used concurrently on different computers m Other than as set forth in this Terms and Conditions section you may not transfer sublicense sell rent lease or lend the Software to another person or entity and you may not make copies of the Software m You may not alter modify adapt convert to another programming language decom pile disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the Software in part or in full and you shall not have another person or entity do so You may not separate the Software from the Hardware and you shall not have another person or entity do so Canon or someone designated by Canon may audit your use of the Software for compliance with these terms at any time In this case Canon or the party designated by Canon will give you reasonable notice of the audit m You may permanently transfer all of your rights to another person or entity to use the Software only when you transfer

Canon C9065S Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents